JP2019170983A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game amusement.SOLUTION: As one performance out of a plurality of display performances, a first display performance may be executed. As one performance out of the plurality of display performances, a second display performance may be executed. As one performance out of the plurality of display performances, a third display performance may be executed. In the first display performance, display of a first mode is executed in a holding correspondence area corresponding to a holding display area displaying the holding. In the second display performance, display of a second mode is executed in the holding correspondence area corresponding to the holding display area. In the third display performance, one mode is selected out of a plurality of modes including the first and second modes, and then display of the selected mode is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 59

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a character image or a design by using a display device when a game ball is won at a start opening (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, an exciting feeling can be given using the display effect.

JP 2016-29956 A

  However, even with the above-described gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of games.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column show the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention at all. .

[Application Example 1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the first mode in the hold corresponding area corresponding to the hold display area for displaying the hold,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the second mode in the hold corresponding area corresponding to the hold display area,
The third display effect is an effect of selecting one of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode and displaying the selected mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example 2]
A gaming machine described in application example 1,
As the display of the first aspect of the first display effect, including a hold change suggestion display that suggests that the hold changes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example 3]
A gaming machine according to Application Example 1 or Application Example 2,
As the display of the second aspect of the second display effect, including a reach suggestion display that suggests the type of reach effect performed in the variation,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 3,
The hold display area is divided into a plurality of areas including a first hold display area and a second hold display area,
The holding corresponding area includes a plurality of corresponding areas respectively corresponding to the plurality of areas divided in the holding display area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 4,
The hold corresponding area is disposed adjacent to the hold display area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be improved.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the main control board of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the sub control board of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating main ROM and main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating determination table T1-T4. It is explanatory drawing of the big hit classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric Chu open | release pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of V opening-and-closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of a main side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of a special electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of V opening-and-closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a V area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flowchart which shows a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of prefetch effect determination processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a prior determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a change production start process. It is explanatory drawing of basic production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during fluctuation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 1st aspect of the 1st movable combination. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable combination. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the combination production of the 1st and 2nd movable accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon visual difficulty production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating holding icon visual difficulty production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon visual difficulty production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design fluctuation | variation display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design fluctuation | variation display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design fluctuation | variation display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating holding | maintenance corresponding | compatible effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending | holding corresponding | compatible effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending | holding corresponding | compatible effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating hold jump effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating holding jump effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating holding jump effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration symbol display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating hit classification suggestion image display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating hit classification suggestion image display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating hit classification suggestion image display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating toreach production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating toreach production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating toreach production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol fluctuation effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol fluctuation effect B. FIG. It is a figure for explaining special symbol change production C. It is a figure for demonstrating suggestion effect A other than detachment. It is a figure for demonstrating suggestion effect B other than detachment. It is a figure for demonstrating suggestion production | presentation C other than detachment. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design fluctuation effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design fluctuation effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design fluctuation effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating special pseudo-continuous production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating special pseudo-continuous production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating special pseudo-continuous production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating normal pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure for demonstrating the pseudo | simulation continuous suggestion image use effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pseudo | simulation continuous suggestion image use effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the full rotation effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating full rotation effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating full rotation effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the countdown fluctuation effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the countdown fluctuation effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the countdown fluctuation effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image superimposition effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image superimposition effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image superimposition effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the character appearance effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the character appearance effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the character appearance effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the reservation continuous suggestion effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the reservation continuous suggestion effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the reservation continuous suggestion effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the area | region display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for explaining field display production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the area | region display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the time reduction mode effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the time reduction mode effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating normal mode production. It is a figure for demonstrating a reservation continuous absence production. It is a figure for demonstrating a reservation continuous presence effect. It is a figure for clarifying a resurrection effect. It is a figure for demonstrating right-handed hold production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the right-handed hold production | presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the right-handed hold effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the instruction | indication image effect A. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an instruction image effect B. It is a figure for explaining the instruction image effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating V prize remaining time alerting | reporting effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating V prize remaining time alerting | reporting effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating V prize remaining time alerting | reporting effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol display effect C. FIG.

<First Embodiment>
1. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in accordance with the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1. The forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires a game ball based on a player's launch operation and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the game ball wins a specific winning device. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached inside the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertical rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a movable frame body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

  The handle 60 is disposed at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and fires a game ball with a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is disposed below the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a performance or the like executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation portion provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end portion of the sword handle, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of performance performed as the game progresses. The The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of executing two different operations: a first operation for pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation for pushing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is disposed around the opening of the front frame 53 and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound effects during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding above the front frame 53.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, a fixed winning device (hews) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electrical chew) 22. A gate (through-chucker) 28, a first grand prize winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big prize winning device (second attacker) 36, a regular prize winning port 27, an out port 16, and indicators. 40.

  The game area 3 is an area where game balls launched by the operation of the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes an effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image display in which hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. And a reserved digest image display area in which the reserved digest image 9C is displayed. The on-hold images 9A and 9B are images representing the on-hold and are also referred to as first on-hold icons 9A and 9B. The reserved digest image 9C is an image representing the hold and is also referred to as a second hold icon 9C. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to simply as a hold icon.

  The first effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. In the middle symbol display area, a medium effect symbol (medium decoration symbol) 8C is displayed. A right effect design (right decoration design) 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured by a plurality of symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. The variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 includes a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a first special symbol and a combination of effects symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (the jackpot lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  For example, when winning a jackpot, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a doublet such as “777”. If it is out of place, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a variation such as “637”. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Moreover, as an aspect of the effect symbol variation display, it may be an aspect of scrolling in the vertical direction or an aspect other than that. Depending on each lottery result, what combination of effect symbols is to be stopped and displayed is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set.

  The second effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. A left effect design (left decoration design) 9L is displayed in the left design display area. In the middle symbol display area, a middle effect symbol (medium decorative symbol) 9C is displayed. In the right symbol display area, a right effect symbol (right decoration symbol) 9R is displayed. The effect symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R are configured by a plurality of symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. The variation display of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 includes a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a first special symbol and a combination of effects symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (the jackpot lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R are formed smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  For example, when winning a jackpot, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a doublet such as “777”. If it is out of place, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a variation such as “637”. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Moreover, as an aspect of the effect symbol variation display, it may be an aspect of scrolling in the vertical direction or an aspect other than that. Depending on each lottery result, what combination of effect symbols is to be stopped and displayed is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R or the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R is also referred to as “effect effect variation effect”, “decoration effect change effect”, or simply “change effect”. In addition, this decorative design variation effect counts the effect in a period (also referred to as a special symbol variation period) from when the special symbol starts to stop until it stops, as one variation effect (one cycle variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbol starts to change until it stops, the temporary stop effect is included in the decorative symbol change effect.

  The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer, and the like in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, effect images such as background images and character images may be displayed in addition to the effect symbols. Further, the image display device 7 can identify that the special symbol is changing or can indicate the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying a reserved image 9A in accordance with the number of stored first special figure holds, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B in accordance with the stored number of second special figure reserved, which will be described later. And a second hold display area. The number of stored first special figure holds displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b by displaying the hold images 9A and 9B. Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digest image display area includes a reserved digest display area for displaying the reserved digest image 9C. The reserved digested image 9C corresponds to the effect design (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a, and the first special figure reserved or the second special figure reserved depending on the display of the reserved digested image 9C. Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14) which is a movable so-called gimmick is provided. The first movable accessory 14 includes a permeable left side plate member 14L and a permeable right side plate member 14R. The left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R are movable to the left and right, respectively, and transition between a closed state that covers the entire image display device 7 and an open state that does not cover the central portion of the image display device 7 as will be described later. It is configured to be possible.

  The center decoration body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. The center decorative body 10 is provided with a movable board movable body 15 (also called a movable board accessory 15) which is a movable so-called gimmick. A stage portion 11 is formed at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. The stage unit 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage unit 11 to a first starting port 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 includes an inlet part through which game balls flow in and an outlet part through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flow in from the inlet part to flow out from the outlet part to the stage unit 11.

  The fixed winning device (jaw) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3 and the first starting port (first starting winning port, first winning ball) where the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. Mouth, fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 is an opportunity for obtaining a jackpot random number and determining the jackpot.

  The normal variable winning device (electrical chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting port (second starting winning port, second winning port, variable starting port) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). When the movable member 23 is in the open state, the second starting port 21 can receive a game ball. It should be noted that the electric chew 22 should be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

  The gate (through chucker) 28 is disposed above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3 and is configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough. The passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for obtaining a normal symbol random number (per random number) and determining a hit.

  Here, the “special symbol lottery” means that when a game ball wins the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is determined in advance. In addition, it is a process for determining whether or not a big jackpot by comparing with a value corresponding to “big jackpot”. The result of the “hit” lottery is not immediately notified to the player, and a special symbol change display is performed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is performed in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. The symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result.

  The “ordinary symbol lottery” means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined “hit”. This is a process for determining whether or not it is a hit. The lottery result of the normal symbol is not necessarily notified immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, but the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 42, which will be described later. When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

  The first grand prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning prize opening (first special winning prize opening) 30 and , A V region 39, a non-V region 70, and a V opening / closing member 71. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special prize opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits the reception of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). The first big prize opening 30 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

  The first grand prize winning device 31 includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first big prize opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening / closing member 71, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions through which the game ball that has passed through the first big winning opening 30 can pass inside the first big winning device 31. . The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of a game ball to the first big prize opening 30. The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first big winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate and rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to play the game ball. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the first state is assigned to the V area 39 (rotation state), and the second state (stop state) is set to be located at the origin and distributes the game balls to the non-V area 70. . Note that the V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game balls that have passed through the first grand prize opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. You may comprise so that it may move to the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. FIG. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is in a retracted state (first state) in which the game balls are distributed to the V region 39, and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the advancing state in which the game balls are distributed to the non-V region 70. You may comprise so that it may become (2nd state). In the gaming machine 1, the passing of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity to shift to a high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability changing operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probability variation operating port. The first grand prize winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first big prize winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big prize winning device 31. The first grand prize winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

  The second grand prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable prize winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big prize winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second major prize winning port (second special prize winning port) 35. It has. The second big prize opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special prize opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows the reception of the game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second grand prize opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in an open state.

  The normal winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. In addition, the number of the normal winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won any of the game holes 3 to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

  The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is referred to as “left-handed”. On the other hand, a method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is referred to as “right hit”. In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting port 20 by left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured to be able to aim for a right-handed pass to the gate 28, winning in the second starting port 21, the first major winning port 30, and the second major winning port 35.

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display device 40. The display 40 includes a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol reservation indicator 43a, and a second special symbol indicator 43b. , A general-purpose hold display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the stored number of operation hold (first special figure hold) of the first special symbol indicator 41a. The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the stored number of operation hold (second special figure hold) of the second special symbol display 41b. The general figure hold display 44 displays the number of stored operation hold (common figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed in response to a winning of a game ball at the first start port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed in response to a winning of a game ball at the second start port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as “special symbols”. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as “special symbol display 41”. Further, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b are collectively referred to as a “special figure hold indicator 43”.

  The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays the lottery based on winning in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , The result of the jackpot lottery). The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the special symbol that is derived and displayed as the display result of the stop symbol and variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (a jackpot symbol) having a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is displayed in an open pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that is displayed in a stopped state (the type of the winning jackpot). Alternatively, a special game (a jackpot game) is performed in which the second grand prize winning opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of several types of jackpots to be described later), 1, 2 from the left such as “○ ●●● ○○ ●●” , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit and the jackpot symbol is displayed. In the case of losing, a losing pattern in which only the rightmost LED is lit, such as “●●●●●●● ○”, is displayed. You may employ | adopt the aspect which light-extinguishes all LED as a loss pattern. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, variation display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variation time. For example, each LED may be lit so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various random number values (numerical information) such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are obtained. Then, it is temporarily stored in the special figure storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting opening 21. The second special figure hold is stored in the second special figure hold storage area 85b (FIG. 5). There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol based on the special figure hold can be variably displayed. “Digestion of special figure hold” means that a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold is determined and variable symbols are displayed to indicate the determination result. Accordingly, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable symbol variable display is performed. Even if there is a win during the execution of a special game or during a special game, the right of lottery for the win can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold display 43. The first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure holding | maintenance display device 43 displays the number of special figure holding | maintenance by lighting LED for the number of special figure holding | maintenance.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as an opportunity. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by variably displaying the normal symbol (variation display) and then displaying the stop symbol. A normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (a normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a variable display result) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by a normal symbol lottery. If the normal stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol of a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 to an open pattern according to the current game state Is done. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  The normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed as “◯◯” (◯: lit, ●: unlit). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol in which only the right LED is lit is displayed as “● ○”. You may employ | adopt the aspect which light-extinguishes all LED as a normal lose pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is changed over a predetermined fluctuation time. As the variation display mode, for example, both LEDs may be lit alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes to the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (per random number) obtained for the passage is stored as a general figure hold in the general figure hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the reserved map storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The general map reservation stored in the general map storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined and variable symbol display for displaying the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol or the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. The common figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common figure holds by turning on the LEDs by the number of common figure hold.

2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control related to game profits such as big wins lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that performs control related to effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

  The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the program stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from other boards via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from the sensors and outputs signals to the solenoids. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first large winning port sensor 30a, a second large winning port sensor 35a, and a V region. The sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning a prize opening sensor 27a are illustrated. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric Chu solenoid 24, the first big prize opening solenoid 33, the second big prize winning solenoid 38, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20 a is provided inside the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has won the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided inside the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has won the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big prize opening sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball won in the first big prize opening 30. The second grand prize opening sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big prize opening 35. The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning port sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning port 27 and detects a game ball won in the normal winning port 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first big prize winning device 31.

  Indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special figure hold display 43a, a second special figure hold display 43b, and a general figure hold. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135, and a launch device 112 is connected via a launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out a prize ball. Based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81, the payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize ball. The prize ball to be paid out is detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out a rental ball. Based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1, the payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the ball rental payout device 130 to pay out the balls. The paid-out ball rental is detected by the ball rental sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information related to ball rental based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the touch of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

  A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed.

  The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to the program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling an effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. CPU92. Details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100 and controls display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for controlling display, the ROM 103 stores still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. And image data such as background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 and performs display control based on the read image data.

  A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the production control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be mounted with a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the voice control board 106 may be mounted with a ROM and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Furthermore, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  The lamp control board 107 is connected to the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and controls them. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, or lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and the light emission pattern Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The first movable combination 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on both the left and right sides of the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The production control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (driving data) for determining the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 are determined according to the operation pattern data. 2 Control the operation of the movable accessory 15. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a CPU, and may cause the CPU to perform lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  An effect button detection switch 63a and a movable frame body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the movable frame body 600, and controls the operation of the movable frame body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch that detects that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed, a touch sensor that is provided on the front frame 53 and outputs a detection signal when the human body touches. It may be connected.

3. Data structure of gaming machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub-ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94.

  The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and a V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in a main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a general figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main process (described later). A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a gaming state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the gaming state are set in the main control main process (described later), and a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first prize flag, a second prize flag, A V flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in main control main processing (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set therein. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which a status in special operation processing described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored, and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, random number groups (holding information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation, respectively. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storage are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, a first random number group (hold information) corresponding to each of the first, second, third, and fourth special figure reservations is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The usual figure reservation storage area 86 stores random value groups (holding information) such as normal symbol random numbers (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the usual figure hold. For this purpose, a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable bodies 14, 15 and the movable frame body 600. A drive data buffer or the like is provided.

  In the sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A), a prefetch effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54 are stored. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in a sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) for storing commands input from the main control unit side in the sub-control main process (described later), and includes a preliminary determination command, a reserved ball number command, a change start command, a change Stored are a stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a gaming state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, and the like. The effect command set area 94b is an area (in which a command output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 is set in the sub control main process (described later) ( An output buffer), a change effect start command, a pre-change end command, a change effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The advance determination information storage area 94c stores advance determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a general figure hold effect counter. A probability variation effect counter, a time reduction effect counter, and the like are set.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. Yes. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires “big hit random number”, “big hit type random number”, “reach random number”, “variable pattern random number”, and “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery (big hit determination) as to whether or not a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “big hit type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning big hit type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “reach random number” is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect design variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and a value in the range of 0 to 127 Take. Reach is a state where there is only one effect symbol that is variably displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and depending on which symbol the effect symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of “7 ↓ 7”) that is a combination of effect symbols indicating a big win. Note that the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if they are shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “ordinary symbol random number (per random number)” is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is performed. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting port (the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21). The random value group acquired based on the entrance to the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure storage area 85a, and the random value group acquired based on the entrance to the second start port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (per random number)” is acquired based on the passage through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the general symbol hold storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “prefetch effect random number” and a “chance up random number” at a timing described later. The “prefetch effect random number” is a random number used to determine the prefetch effect at the time of the change effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “chance up random number” is a random number used to determine the chance up effect at the time of the fluctuation effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “prefetching effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the prior determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance-up random number” is acquired based on the output of the change start command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows the diagram. FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

  The jackpot determination table T1 indicates whether the jackpot random number value (any one of 0 to 65535) corresponds to “hit” or “losing” in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, in the “normal probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”, it is determined as “big hit”, and the jackpot random value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ")" Indicates that it is determined to be "lost". In the “high probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 649”, it is determined as “big hit”, and when the jackpot random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)”. Is determined to be “lost”. The contents of “normal probability state” and “high probability state” will be described later.

  In the reach determination table T2, in the game control microcomputer 81, the acquired reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to “with reach” or “without reach” in the main control main process (described later). It is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time-short state”, it is determined that “there is a reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). 127) "indicates that it is determined that" no reach ". Further, when the reach random number value is “0 to 5” in the “short time state”, it is determined that “there is present”, and when the reach random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”. Indicates that “no reach” is determined. The contents of “time saving state” and “non-time saving state” will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-short state is less likely to reach the lost time than the non-time-short state. This is to increase the digestion speed of special figure reservation by selecting more reachless loses with a short variation time in the short time state.

  The normal symbol hit determination table T3 corresponds to whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to “win” or “lost” in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. It is a table referred to for determining whether to do. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 2” in the “non-time-short state”, it is determined as “winning”, and the normal symbol random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 2” (3 ˜255) ”indicates that it is determined to be“ lost ”. Further, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 254” in the “time saving state”, it is determined as “winning”, and when the normal symbol random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)”. It is shown that it is determined as “losing”.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 determines how many seconds the variation time of the normal symbol depends on the game state (non-short time state or short time state) in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. This is a table that is referred to. In FIG. 8D, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be “30 seconds” in the “non-short-time state”, and the normal symbol variation time is determined to be “1 second” in the “time-short state”. It has been shown.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. According to the jackpot type determination table T5, in the main control main process (described later), the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the jackpot type random number (any one of 0 to 127) according to the “big hit type” and “special symbol type”. It is a table referred to in order to determine “type”. In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random number value is “0 to 24”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV planned passing jackpot”, One stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined as “big hit symbol 1”. When the jackpot type random number value is “25 to 49”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV scheduled jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 2”. When the jackpot type random number value is “50 to 55”, the jackpot type is determined as “16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined as “jackpot symbol 3”. When the jackpot type random number value is “56 to 67”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantial 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 4”. When the jackpot type random number value is “68 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127), the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV scheduled passing jackpot”, It is shown that the stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) in the special figure 2 is determined as the “big hit symbol 1”. By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the “special figure stop symbol data” corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, the “opening (OP) command”, the “round designation command”, the “ending (ED)” of the special game Command "can also be specified. For specific details of “16RV planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 15R) V planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 13R) V planned jackpot” and “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot” It will be described later.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-short-time state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time-short state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random value (0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later). . In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time-saving state, it is determined as “losing” in the jackpot determination table T1, “reach is present” is determined in the reach determination table T2, and the number of held balls is “1”. When the variation pattern random number value is “0-60”, the variation pattern is determined to be “P7”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the short-time state, it is determined as “big hit” in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as “16RV expected jackpot” in the jackpot type determination table T5. Is “0 to 10”, it is indicated that the variation pattern is determined to be “P61”. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching reach, it is also determined whether the reach is normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production that has a longer variation time after reach than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) having different fluctuation times are set. The length of the variation time is SP3> SP2> SP1. In SP1 to SP3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 and SP3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuations.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew release pattern determination table T7. The electric chew release pattern determination table T7 is used for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the electric chew 22 in accordance with the game state (non-short-time state or short-time state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 12 (A), the open pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined as “open pattern 11” in the “non-short-time state”, and the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 12” in the “short-time state”. It has been shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once and the opening time is 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened at an opening time of 3 seconds, an opening time of 2.0 seconds, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when there is a predetermined number of game balls won (a predetermined number of winnings, a maximum of 10).

  FIG. 13 is a view for explaining the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the main winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, in the main control main process (described later), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the first main winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to in order to determine 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is “open pattern 21”. When the special figure stop symbol data is “14H” or “15H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop symbol data is “13H”, the release pattern is “open”. It is shown that the pattern is determined as “pattern 23”. FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first grand opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th and 15th R, and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. The second grand prize winning opening 35 having an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first grand opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th rounds with the number of times of opening once and the opening time of 29.5 seconds, and the number of times of opening once for the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big prize opening 35 is opened (short-open) for 0.1 seconds, and the first big prize opening 30 is opened (short-open) for the number of times of opening once and for 0.1 seconds at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, the first grand prize opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th and 15th R, with the number of times of opening once and the opening time of 29.5 seconds. The second grand prize opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and at the 16th round, the second big prize opening 35 is opened (long opening) with the number of times of opening once and an opening time of 29.5 seconds. . However, the opening of the first grand prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 may be performed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (the maximum number of winning prizes is 9). Closed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined as “open pattern 31”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined. When the data is “13H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 32”, and when the special figure stop symbol data is “14H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 33”, and the special figure stop symbol data is When “15H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 34”. FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds when the first winning prize 30 is received at the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth rounds. In the 10th and 12th R, when the first prize is received in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is received, the opening time The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, when the first winning prize 30 is received at the second, fourth, sixth, and twelfth R, the V opening and closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second. On the 8th and 10th R, when the first winning prize 30 is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second winning is received, the opening time The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when the first winning prize 30 is received in the second and sixth rounds, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and the second winning is found. When this occurs, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the fourth, eighth, tenth and twelfth rounds, when the first winning prize 30 is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second when the first winning prize 30 is received in the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth and twelfth rounds. .

4). Explanation of jackpot etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are “bonanza” and “losing” as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of “losing”, the special symbol display 41 stops and displays “losing symbol”. When winning a jackpot, the winning prize opening (the first winning prize opening 30 and the second winning prize opening 35) is opened with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (the type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the last round game is finished. Yes. Each round game starts at the end of the opening or at the end of the previous round game and ends at the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The jackpot type is as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into “V pass planned jackpot” and “V non-passed jackpot”. “V pass planned jackpot” operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (a V passing scheduled opening pattern) in which a game ball can pass to the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H, 21H corresponds to the “V passing planned jackpot”. The combination of the opening pattern of the opening and closing member 32 and the opening and closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 21: open pattern 31), (open pattern 22: open pattern 33). ) Or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V area 39 during the big hit game. “V non-passing expected jackpot” is an opening pattern in which a game ball cannot pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern), the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 and the V opening / closing member 71. It is a jackpot that operates. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data of 17H corresponds to the “V non-passing jackpot”. When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region during the jackpot game The game ball cannot pass to 39. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 serves as both a V passing planned opening pattern and a V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

  “V-planned jackpot” includes “16RV-planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 13R) V-planned jackpot” and “16R (substantial 15R) V-planned jackpot”. The “16RV expected jackpot” has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first grand prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second grand prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big prize opening 30.

  “16R (substantial 13R) V passing expected jackpot” has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R and Even at 16R, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot”, from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is a jackpot of substantially 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30.

  “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot” has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot”, 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short and no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot” is a jackpot of substantially 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big prize opening 30.

  “V non-passing jackpot” is “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot” of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R and Even at 16R, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot”, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot” is a jackpot of substantially 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass through.

  As apparent from the above description, the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot” and the “16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot” are the first grand prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot” is that it is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30 and the gaming state after the jackpot is Low accuracy time short state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot” makes it easy to pass the game ball to the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30 and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a short time state (highly accurate high base state). This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot” and “16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot”, and the gaming state after the jackpot is less probable. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time-short state (low-accuracy base state) or the high-accuracy time-short state (high-accuracy high-base state) is reached. That is, the game state after “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is a high-probability time-short state (high-probability high-base state) when a game ball passes through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30 ) But a high probability is a latent state (latent probability variation state).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution ratio in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V pass expected jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passed jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2) are all the jackpots that are expected to pass V. In other words, when a big win is won by a lottery based on winning a prize to the second starting port 21 that can be entered by executing electric support control, which will be described later, the V passing planned jackpot is always made. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot that is performed by winning the game ball at the second start port 21 rather than the jackpot lottery (the lottery of the first special symbol) that is performed by winning the game ball at the first start port 20. The lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be advantageous to the player.

5. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute “probability variation control” and “variation time reduction control” for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a “high probability state”, and the state where the probability variation control is not performed is simply referred to as a “normal probability state ( Non-high probability state, low probability state) ”. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by performing the jackpot determination. Accordingly, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed. The probability that the display result of the special symbol variable display (stop symbol) becomes a jackpot symbol is high.

  In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the variable time reduction control with respect to the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a “time-short state”, and the state in which the game time control is not being performed is simply “a non-time-short state”. That's it. In the short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed) is shorter than that in the non-short-time state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) determined so that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more frequently than in a non-time reduction state in the time-short state. The used variation pattern is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variable time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed. A short variation time is easily selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the short-time state, the special-patch holding pace is accelerated, and an effective winning (a winning that can be stored as a special-pending hold) at the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may execute the probability variation control and the variation time shortening control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 at the same time, or may execute only one of them.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the normal symbol in the time-short state and does not execute it in the non-time-short state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol per-symbol determination table T3 in which the number of normal symbol random values (hit random number values) determined to be hit is more in the short-time state than in the non-short-time state as the normal symbol probability variation control. Using FIG. 8C, a hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the short time state, the hit probability is higher than that in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control on the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed. The probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable symbol normal display will be a winning symbol increases. In the short-time state, the normal symbol variation time is shorter than in the non-short-time state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-short-time state, but is 1 second in the short-time state (FIG. 8D). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the short time state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-short time state (FIG. 12). In other words, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, and the game balls are frequently won at the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these controls are executed is referred to as a “high base state”, and a state in which these controls are not executed is referred to as a “low base state”. In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control to support winning at the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is executed. The high base state (electric support control state) may not execute all the controls described above. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the open time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the open count increase control for the electric chew 22 It is only necessary that by executing one or more controls, the electric chew 22 can be opened more easily than when the control is not being performed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time reduction state.

  In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the planned V passing jackpot is a high probability state, a short time state, and a high base state if the player has passed the V area 39 during the jackpot game. . This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate high base state” or a “highly accurate time-short state”. The high-accuracy base state ends when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (160 times in this case) or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game due to winning the non-passing jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V area 39 is passed (almost never) during the jackpot game. State, ie, a low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low accuracy high base state” and a “low accuracy time short state”. The low-accuracy base state is terminated when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-short state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low probability low base state”. The low probability low base state may be referred to as “normal game state” or “low probability non-short state (also simply referred to as non-short state)”. A state in which a special game (a jackpot game) is being executed is referred to as a “special game state (a jackpot game state)”. Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a “specific game state”.

  In a high base state, such as a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously when the game ball is advanced to the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. The electric support control makes it easier for the electric chew 22 to be opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the player makes a right turn to win the game ball to the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of start prizes (win prizes at the start opening) rather than left-handed. Note that the gaming machine 1 plays a right-handed game even during a big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by left-handed. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start port 20 than to win the second start port 21. It is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, the player makes a left turn to win the game ball at the first start port 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of start prizes than right-handed.

6). Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success / failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the prior / failure determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interruption of interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs various random number counter values (big hit random number value, big hit type random number value, reach random number value, fluctuation pattern random number value shown in FIG. 7A). , Normal symbol random value) is added and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While the interrupt is permitted, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, after the main-side timer interrupt processing is completed and until the main-side timer interrupt processing is started next, update processing of various counter values by normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing is not started immediately but is started after the interrupt is permitted.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. This random number update processing is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing performed in the main control main processing (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values includes the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process until the start of the next main timer interrupt process) And both.

  After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for paying out a winning ball according to the type of winning opening to the output of the main RAM 84. Set to buffer. The various sensors are, for example, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the first big winning port sensor 30a, the second big winning port sensor 35a, and the normal winning port sensor 27a (FIG. 3).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the start port sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V region sensor detection process (step S106), holding ball. Number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In the other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. When the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S202). The number of normal symbol reservation balls is the number of general symbol reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of general symbol reservations provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is “4” (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is “3” or less (step S202: NO), “1” is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-H), and uses the obtained random number value as the first to first reserved memory areas 86 of the main RAM 84. The fourth storage area is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

  In step S <b> 205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second start port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of second special figure reserved, more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of second special figure reserved. If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “3” or less (step S206: NO), “1” is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number (step S207), and then a special figure 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S207). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label) -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure hold storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. Memorize (hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process will be described later.

  In step S <b> 210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “4 (upper limit value)” ( Step S211). The special figure 1 reserved ball number is the number of the first special figure hold, more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the first special figure hold. If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “4” (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is equal to or less than “3” (step S211: NO), after adding “1” to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), a special figure 1 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S212). S213). Here, similarly to the above-described special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure holding storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. Memorize (hold). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Prior Judgment Processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). When the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, no prior determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and makes a jackpot advance determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the predetermination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a prior determination as to whether or not the game is a big hit using the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referenced and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 uses the high probability state table (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. It is judged beforehand whether it is a big hit with reference. That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “649”, it is preliminarily determined as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as “lost”. In this embodiment, prior determination is performed using a jackpot determination table T1 used in jackpot determination processing (FIG. 23) described later. However, as another embodiment, for prior determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. The prior determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

  When the result of the big hit prior determination is “losing” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot prior determination is “big hit” (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type prior determination (step S305). In the jackpot type prior determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a prior determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number value is “0” to “127”, it is pre-determined as “16RV expected jackpot”. In this embodiment, prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later. However, as another embodiment, the advance determination is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

  In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a change pattern advance determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly includes a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And the reach random value is acquired. Next, here, since the time-short state (the time-short flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the time-short state variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11), the jackpot advance determination result of step S304, The fluctuation pattern is specified from the reach presence / absence prior determination result obtained from the reach random number value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 in FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot advance determination result and the reach presence / absence determination result, a loss with reach is determined in advance, and the random number value of the variation pattern is “60”, the game control microcomputer 81 has a reserved ball count of “1-2 ", The variation pattern" P64 "to be selected, and if the number of reserved balls is" 3 to 4 ", the variation pattern" P68 "to be selected is selected. In the present embodiment, prior determination is performed using a variation pattern determination table T6 used in a variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later. However, as another embodiment, a variation pattern determination table T6 is used. Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from the above.

  In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a prior determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning, and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created prior determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-described special figure 2 pre-determination process, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot advance determination with reference to the normal probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, since the normal probability state (the probability variation flag is OFF) here, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the normal probability state table (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164” in the jackpot determination table T1). )) To determine whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “164”, it is preliminarily determined as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as “lost”. The jackpot prior determination may use a jackpot determination table for prior determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processes in steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 in the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not operating (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of retained balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is “0” (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol held balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Accordingly, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 in a state where the number of held balls of the normal symbol is “0”, the number of held balls of the normal symbol is once “1” in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of held balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes “0”. The same applies to the number of reserved balls for special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of special symbols held temporarily becomes “1”, and thereafter, step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes “0”. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly sets a normal symbol random number value (as a determination value) stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the general figure hold storage area) of the general figure hold storage area 86. Per random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether or not it is in the short time state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, when the normal symbol random number value is “0” to “2” in the non-time-short state, it is determined as “winning”, and when the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is determined as “lost”. (See FIG. 8C).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a short-time state), and uses the gaming state determination result and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol variation. The variation time of the normal symbol as a pattern is selected. Here, in the non-short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined as “30 seconds”, and in the short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined as “1 second” (see FIG. 8D). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start normal symbol variation display (step S507).

  In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has ended. The variation time of the normal symbol is the variation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). When the variation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol variation display is continued. On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and in the case of “losing” in the above-described hit determination (step S505). (Step S510: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, if the winning determination is “win” (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew release pattern (step S511). The open pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew open pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines a game state (whether or not it is a short time state), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew release pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22 release pattern. Select. Here, “open pattern 11” is selected in the non-time saving state, and “open pattern 12” is selected in the time saving state. After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends the present process.

  In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings to the electric chew 22 has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, six), or the operation time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been achieved is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521). Finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display device 41 and the special prize winning device (the first big prize winning device 31 and the second big prize winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is set to “1” of “special operation status”, Called “2”, “3”, “4”. When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the “special operation status” is “2” (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol variation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol variation processing, the variation stop command is output after the variation time has elapsed. When the “special operation status” is “3” (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, an output of an opening command or the like is executed at a big hit. When the “special operation status” is “4” (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), the special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a big hit game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1401). When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning to the second starting port 21 is stored. If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. According to the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was put on hold. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9B (the leftmost hold image 9B among the four hold images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (the second, third and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) are on the left side, respectively. Shift one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, a fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and a fluctuation time timer is set. The variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2”. The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information regarding the variation time) is included.

  In step S1401, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "0" ( Step S1407). In the case where the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), that is, the random number value group acquired due to the winning to the first start port 20 in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in a place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was put on hold. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9A (the rightmost hold image 9A among the four hold images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digest image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digest image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9A (the second, third and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one 1st special figure reservation was digested. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, a fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2” (step S1406). Note that the fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the variation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding the variation time) is included.

  In step S1407, if the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demonstration screen for waiting for customers. For example, the game control microcomputer 81 may make the determination based on ON / OFF of a demo screen display flag for waiting for a customer. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer standby standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414) This processing is finished. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display based on the first special figure hold is executed only when the second special figure hold is “0”. That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold has a larger profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (V pass planned jackpot). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) in FIG. 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) in FIG. 1 are the same in processing flow, and will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process in FIG. 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one in the second special chart hold area) 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of FIG. 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special chart hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since it is a high probability state (the probability variation flag is ON), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. judge.

  When the probability variation flag is OFF in step S1501 (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination with reference to the normal probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) ( Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, whether the big hit is based on the normal probability state table (the big hit determination value is “0” to “164”) in the big hit determination table T1 Determine whether or not.

  When the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit” (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process in FIG. 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special chart holding storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of FIG. 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special chart holding storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is “lost”, the special figure stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the lost symbol is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). This process is terminated.

[Variation pattern selection processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process (step S1403) in FIG. 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) in FIG. 1 have the same process flow and will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is a short time state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not the time is short is made depending on whether or not the time flag is ON. If the time is short (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If it is not the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always a V passing planned jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. When the jackpot is special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a V passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. This is done based on the special figure stop symbol data.

  When the jackpot type is a V passing planned jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes with reference to the table for the non-time-saving state V passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a variation pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure reservation storage area) 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 1, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as the table for the non-time-short state V passing expected jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V-passing expected jackpot in the non-time-short state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. ”To“ P3 ”, and in FIG. 2, the variation pattern“ P21 ”to“ P23 ”) is referred to (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of “P1” to “P3” is selected as the variation pattern in the special figure 1 and any one of “P21” to “P23” in the special figure 2.

  When the jackpot type is a V non-passing expected jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-short-time state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, the variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as the table for the non-time-short state V non-passing expected jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) in the non-time-short state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. Part). One of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  If the jackpot flag is OFF in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure holding) is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is a non-short-time state, the reach determination table T2 is based on the table for the non-time-short state (reach presence determination value (reach establishment random number value is a portion from “0” to “13”)). Determine presence or absence.

  When the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, when the reach is lost, the game control microcomputer 81 is in a non-short-time state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach loss table (step S1608). Here, as the table for non-short-time state reach loss, the portion corresponding to the reach-less loss in the non-time-short state change pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 10 (in FIG. 1, the change pattern is “P7”- Reference is made to the “P14” portion, and in FIG. 2 the fluctuation pattern “P24” to “P31” portion). In the special figure 1, any one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as a fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 reserved ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, any one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as a fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 reserved ball number (1 to 4). Since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls is activated. That is, in both of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, when the number of reserved balls is “3” to “4”, the variation time is longer than that when the number of reserved balls is “1” to “2”. More short variation patterns are selected. Thereby, when there are many reservation balls, the digestion speed of special figure reservation can be accelerated.

  When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-short-time state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for losing without reach (step S1609). Here, as the table for non-short-time state non-reach loss, the portion corresponding to the non-reach-time loss in the non-time-short state change pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. Reference is made to the “P16” portion, and in FIG. 2, the variation pattern “P32” to “P33” portion. In FIG. 1, either “P15” or “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 reserved ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, either “P32” or “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 reserved ball number (1 to 4). Again, since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a shortening variation function according to the number of retained balls is activated.

  If it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the short-time state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and thus description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in step S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is already described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. And different. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-short-time state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the short-time state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the expected V passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the expected V passing jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the short time state shown in FIG. Is referred to as “P41” to “P43”, and in FIG. From the read fluctuation pattern random value, any one of “P41” to “P43” is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 and any one of “P61” to “P63” in the special figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a planned V non-passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the planned non-passing jackpot in the short-time state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 11 (“P44 ”To“ P46 ”). One of “P44” to “P46” is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends the process. The set variation pattern information is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). Thereby, the change display of the special symbol is started.

[Special symbol change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described above. If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the special symbol variation display started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to “3” (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the change stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “1” (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

  If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the winning pattern and the opening / closing pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 21” is set as the open pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 31” is set as the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of winning jackpot together with the set of the winning pattern and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “16” is set in the round counter (FIG. 13B).

  After the opening pattern is set, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag, and the contents will be described later. After the gaming state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to “4” (step S1807), and this process is finished.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of times the special symbol is changed during the high probability state. Here, “160” is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not “0” (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0” (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

  In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time reduction flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time reduction flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of times the special symbol is changed during the time reduction state. Here, at the time of shifting to the time-short state, “100” is set in the time-short counter if the low-accuracy base state is set, and “160” is set in the time-short counter if the base state is high-accuracy. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the hourly counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the hour / hour counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the hour / hour flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

  In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information on the current gaming state that has just been set (whether it is a certain change state, a certain change counter value, whether it is a short time state, a short time counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If the time reduction flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is terminated. When the time reduction flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time reduction flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time-short state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-short-time state, the gaming machine 1 is in the low base state while the jackpot game is being executed.

[Special electric material processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory process (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “hit winning flag” is a flag that indicates that the opening of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the release pattern has been completed in the running big hit game. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the big hit end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening / closing member operation processing for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 according to the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls have won the first grand prize opening 30. When the predetermined game ball is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period. Details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  If the special winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the special winning opening (step S2203). For example, when the time for opening the jackpot has passed and the opening time of the first round game has been reached, or when the time for opening the grand prize opening is reached, the grand prize opening that was temporarily closed after the opening is opened again This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until has elapsed and the time for opening again is reached. If it is not time to open the big prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  When it is time (timing) for opening the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of jackpot. After the big prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In the present embodiment, a large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, in the case where a large number of winning holes are opened during a single round game, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured so that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first release, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After setting the round designation command, this process is finished.

  In the above-described step S2202, when the special winning opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special winning opening closing condition is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes in the round winning game in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum winning quantity (for example, 9 per round), or the time for closing the big winning opening. (That is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening). If the closing condition for the special winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the special winning opening is established (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the special winning opening (step S2211).

  If it is not the time (timing) for opening the big winning opening in the above-described step S2203, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (in this case, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the grand prize opening was closed. This is because the closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing as described above. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

  When the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round counter value to 1 decrement (step S2221), and determines whether or not the round counter value is “0”. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not “0” (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not been consumed yet, the present process is terminated to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, the jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when a game ball has passed to the V region 39 with “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled It is the same length as the ending time when there is no game ball passing to the V region 39 in the “big hit”. As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V region 39 with the “16R (substantially 13R) V expected to pass big hit”, the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passed expected big hit It can be recognized that the game ball has not passed through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the process is terminated.

  In the above-described step S2200, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and displays a special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation process. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening and closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that the round is an open round when the value of the round counter is “15”, “13”, “11”, “9”, “7”, “5”. When it is not the open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process is finished. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

  If it is the open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the first ball winning is detected (step S2503). When the first ball winning is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process is finished. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning opening 30 in the round and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

  When the first winning is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 in a short circuit and performs a V valid period setting process (step S2504). The V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened in the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), regardless of whether it is “short open” or “long open”. This is because sometimes a short opening (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. Note that when the V opening / closing member 71 is short-circuited, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short. Therefore, the first game ball won in the first big winning opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, a few seconds after the V opening / closing member 71 is opened and after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed are set to a V effective period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 in a short circuit (here, 0.1 second) in accordance with the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And 1 second after closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not being executed) as a V invalid period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid” means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a (V region sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is invalid” means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes a few seconds after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V region sensor 39a. This is in consideration of a period until a game ball that has entered the V region 39 immediately before closing the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage during the V effective period (the passing of the game ball to the V area 39) is detected, and the V flag is detected when the V passage outside the V effective period (the V invalid period) is detected. It is supposed not to turn on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). In this way, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraud, so that the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. Is performed (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long open. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). When it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, when it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, when it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning is detected (step S2522). When the second winning is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

  When the second winning is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs a V valid period setting process (step S2523). The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)) is “long opening” and the long opening is made when the second ball is won (here, a maximum of 31.5 seconds). ). In addition, since the maximum round game time here is 31.5 seconds (maximum winning opening maximum opening time 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), generally the second ball winning The time from the time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the long opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is because the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long, so that at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls won in the first big winning opening 30 will open the V region 39. It is configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period when the V opening and closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period along with the closing of the V open and closed member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (2 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. Make a decision.

  When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), the V opening / closing member closing process, and the V ineffective period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) has elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, Set and finish this process.

  If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 can be exemplified by a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) elapses after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 in the case of short opening, for example. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is finished. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the process is finished while the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state and the V effective period is continued.

  In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572) and ends the process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the hour / hour flag is turned ON (step S2302), and “100” is set to the hour / hour counter (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a “non-high probability state”, a “short time state”, and a “high base state” (that is, a low probability high base). This low-accuracy base state is terminated when either of the special symbol variable display is performed 100 times or the next jackpot is won.

  On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets “160” in the probability change counter (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time reduction flag (step S2307) and sets “160” in the time reduction counter (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a “high probability state”, a “time-short state”, and a “high base state” (that is, a highly accurate high base). This high-accuracy base state ends when either of the special symbol variable display is performed 160 times or the next jackpot is won.

  In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the gaming state that has just been set.

[V-area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V effective period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball break period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. Is done. If it is not during the V effective period (step S2602: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is during the V effective period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passing command (step S2604), and ends this process. .

[Reserved ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number process (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number. . After setting the held ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

7. Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interruption of the interruption process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition to adding one by one, two or more random numbers may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While the interrupt is permitted, the sub timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub timer interruption process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed after the sub timer interrupt process is completed and before the next sub timer interrupt process is started.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub timer interruption process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variation effect (step S4305). The process during the change effect is a process for setting a pre-change end command at a specific timing during the change effect and causing the display screen 7a to execute the specific display effect, and details thereof will be described later. After the variation effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 by the received command analysis process or the like, the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. To the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received the various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received the various commands executes voice effects in which voice is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that performs light emission control of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320) and ends the process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing or the like is performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a prior determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The “prefetching effect determination process” is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect and a prefetching effect pattern in the case of executing the prefetching effect. Details of the pre-reading effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S4415: NO), the above-described prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that jackpot is included in the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85, and is executed during the change effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a reserved ball number command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the general figure hold effect counter are updated. Thereby, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side can hold the information of the number of each retained ball. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the ordinary figure hold effect counter, and the hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, when the pending ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). “Variation effect start processing” is processing for selecting a variation effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the special symbol change. Details of the variation production start process will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variation effect start process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), a variation effect end process is performed (step S4470). The “variation effect end process” is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol change. In the variation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 being changed is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the change stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-described change effect end process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination included in the opening command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is displayed in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94 Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. Are displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-described opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it is received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The “round effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big prize opening or during the interval between releases in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data and information related to the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, an effect pattern of a preset round effect corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is displayed in the effect of the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In step S4485, if the round designation command has not been received (step S4485: NO), the round effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it is received (step S4495: YES), an ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). “Ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the information related to the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (whether the state is a high probability state, whether the state is a short time state, the probability change) Counter, hourly counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. In addition, when the V control command is received, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the sub RAM 94 to hold the information that has passed V. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process based on a command other than the above (customer standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this process.

[Pre-reading effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a prior determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot advance determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type advance determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the prior determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information described above, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c. The prefetch effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the prefetch effect executed during the variation effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39A, the jackpot determination information “losing” and the variation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the prior determination results respectively corresponding to the first to third items on the special figure 2 hold. A state is shown in which a pre-determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the storage area and stored in the area. FIG. 39B shows a special figure 2 winning from the state shown in FIG. 39A. The pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is shown in the fourth figure in FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information “big hit”, the jackpot type information “21H”, and the variation pattern information “P61” are stored as the prior determination information. In addition, in addition to the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved special figure 2 and the area corresponding to the change, “pattern A” is used as pre-reading effect pattern information. "Is set. FIG. 39C shows a state in which the change has been completed from the state of FIG. 39B and the prior determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, and the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas. The preliminary determination information in the four storage areas is cleared. The prior determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

  Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94 c (step S 4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in either the relevant area of the prior determination information storage area 94c or the first to fourth storage areas, new pre-reading effect pattern information is not selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 indicates that the advance determination result included in the received advance determination command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not “Leach with reach” has occurred (step S4603). Whether it is “big hit” or “losing with reach” can be determined, for example, based on a variation pattern prior determination result (variation pattern information). When the prior determination result included in the received prior determination command is “no reach loss” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform pre-reading production. On the other hand, when the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “big hit” or “losing with reach” (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute the pre-reading effect, And prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the prefetch effect random number counter, and refers to the acquired random number value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether or not to perform the pre-read effect is determined.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the prefetch effect random value is “0 to 55”, the prefetch effect is “none”, and when the prefetch effect random number is “56 to 67”, the prefetch effect is When “pattern A” is selected and the prefetch effect random number is “68 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as the prefetch effect. Further, when the pre-determined result is “Leach with reach” and the prefetch effect random value is “0 to 107”, the prefetch effect is “None”, and when the prefetch effect random value is “108 to 114”, the prefetch effect is When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random value is “115 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as the pre-reading effect. Note that the type and content of the prefetch effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

  Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetch effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected prefetch effect pattern is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage prior to the corresponding storage area. The prefetch effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only “pattern A” is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area. Also set “Pattern A”. As a result, the prefetch effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the region and the first to third storage areas) executed before the change effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. . Whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed with the variation effect corresponding to the region depends on the progress of the variation effect. That is, in the variation effect, the prefetch effect is not executed if the timing for executing the prefetch effect has already passed, but if it is before the timing for executing the prefetch effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the change start command (step S5000). Here, the production control microcomputer 91 sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the change start command and information related to the change pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and symbol information acquired here can be referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a basic effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic structure of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image on the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variation effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a prefetch effect on the basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine the basic effect pattern.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing normal reach effects, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP1 effects, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP2 effects, and a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP3 effects, A plurality of types of basic production patterns for performing reach-less loss production are set. The kind of basic production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is “P1”, the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is “P72”, the basic effect pattern that performs the reach-less loss effect is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-short state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 includes a part for determining a chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation pattern is “P21” to “P33”, “P41” to “P56”, “61” to “73”. It may or may not be provided.

  In FIG. 43, “2-NO” “2-SP1” “2-SP2” “2-SP3” “3-NO” “3-SP1” “3-SP2” “3-SP3” “ “4-NO”, “4-SP1”, “4-SP2”, “4-SP3”, and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance up effects described later.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to combine the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. Thus, it is determined what kind of effect is to be performed as the variable effect.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a change effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that a change effect based on the change effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized. Step S5020). When the change effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the change effect image. The data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. In the variation effect timer, a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set. For example, when the variation pattern is “P1”, “40 seconds” is set in the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the fluctuating effect process (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change effect is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the changing effect is being performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not the changing effect timer is zero. If the variation effect is not being performed (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the changing effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect controlling microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-change end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-change end command is a command for the effect control microcomputer 91 to notify the image control board 100 or the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-change end command. In accordance with the information included in the pre-change end command, the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, and the like.

  If it is not the time to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is time to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-change end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), the pre-change end command not including the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). Thereby, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a command before end of change including pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect for displaying a prefetch effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, the pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect for fading the preview image.

8). Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A buffer or the like which appears in the operation description of the image control microcomputer 101 is provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a change effect start command is received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If the image is received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the change effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads a predetermined variation effect image instructed in the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it is received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts pre-reading effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-change end command, and if the pre-change end command includes pre-read effect pattern information, reads a predetermined pre-read effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. 7 on the display screen 7a. Even if the pre-change end command does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information, if the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the notification fade effect for fading the preview image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect end command is received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). When the image is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image with the variable effect stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when receiving the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a is displayed. When a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. When a ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a, and this process is terminated.

  9. Operation of movable accessory (panel movable body 15)

9. Operation of the movable board (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) The operation of the movable board (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) will be described with reference to FIGS. explain. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the first mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control for operating the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during a game effect (display effect) or an initial operation when the power is turned on.

  The first movable accessory 14 includes two permeable plate members, a left side plate member 14L and a right side plate member 14R. Here, the “transparent plate member” means that at least a part of an image or the like located on the opposite side of the plate member can be seen through the plate member, and the image on the opposite side can be seen. It is not necessary to be completely transparent, and it may be transparent. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable combination 14 can be stopped at the first position covering a part of the display screen 7a by the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R (first mode). At this time, the left side plate member 14L covers a part of the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right side plate member 14R covers a part of the right side of the display screen 7a. 46, the left movable plate member 14L is further advanced to the right side and the right movable plate member 14R is further advanced to the left side so that the first movable accessory 14 can be stopped at the second position shown in FIG. Yes (second embodiment). In the second position, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. On the other hand, the left side plate member 14L is retracted to the left side and the right side plate member 14R is retracted to the right side, so that it can be stopped at the third position (home position) shown in FIG. 48 (third mode). In the third position, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R are in a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize each. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that the area covering the display screen 7a increases when the third mode, the first mode, and the second mode are sequentially shifted.

  The second movable accessory 15 includes a rotating body on which a face is drawn. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 46, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the first position (home position) where the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10 (first mode). At this time, a part of the lower side of the rotating body is visible. In the second movable accessory 15, the rotating body advances downward from the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 46, and can perform a rotation effect as shown in FIG. 48 in front of the display screen 7 a (second mode). . When the second movable combination 15 is in the second mode in the state where the first movable combination 14 is in the second mode, the rotating body of the rotating second movable combination 15 is shown in FIG. Can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14. Thus, the 1st movable combination 14 and the 2nd movable combination 15 can perform combination production which combined mutual operation.

10. Examples of Effects, Examples of Effects, Modifications, and Aspects of Embodiments Hereinafter, examples of effects (examples of display effects and examples of movable object effects) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modified example, and an example of the effect example will be described together.
As described above, the effects to be described are based on various information (such as jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, prior determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Further, when there is no particular need in the display effect example, the hold display (hold icon) and the decorative pattern change display are omitted. Further, the character CRA may be displayed in the display effect example, but in this case, the description may be omitted.

  The hold icon display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This hold icon display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect or a stop display. For example, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes a hold ball number command or a change stop command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a hold icon display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect that is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon display effect A]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon display effect A. In the hold icon display effect A, first, the four hold display of FIG. 50 (A) is executed. Specifically, first, on the display screen 7a, the first hold image 9A1, the second hold image 9A2, the third hold image 9A3, the fourth hold image 9A4, the hold image 9C, and the first image IM1. The second image IM2 and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. The first hold image 9A1 is the leftmost hold image of the hold image (hold icon) 9A, and the second hold image 9A2 is the second hold image from the left of the hold image 9A. The third hold image 9A3 is the third hold image from the left of the hold images 9A, and the fourth hold image 9A4 is the rightmost hold image of the hold images 9A. The four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are approximately equal in size.

  The first image IM1 is a substantially semicircular image, and four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are arranged at substantially equal intervals on the circumference. As a result, the first reserved image 9A1 and the fourth reserved image 9A4 have the same position in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen 7a. In addition, the second reserved image 9A2 and the third reserved image 9A3 have the same position in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen 7a. That is, the second reserved image 9A2 is positioned above the first reserved image 9A1, and the third reserved image 9A3 is positioned above the fourth reserved image 9A4. The size of the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 is smaller than that of the reserved image 9C. The upper end of the reserved image 9C is located above the display screen 7a from the upper end of the first reserved image 9A1, and is positioned below the display screen 7a from the upper end of the second reserved image 9A2. is doing. The four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 have different positions in the horizontal direction (left-right direction) of the display screen 7a. Here, in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a, the first reserved image 9A1, the second reserved image 9A2, the third reserved image 9A3, and the fourth reserved image 9A4 are arranged at substantially equal intervals from the left side.

  The second image IM2 is a horizontally long and substantially rectangular image provided on both sides of the first image IM1, and the reserved image 9C is in contact therewith. The first movable combination 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 is visible through the first movable combination 14. In FIG. 50A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner.

  After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the reserved digest effect shown in FIG. 50 (B) is executed. Specifically, the reserved image 9C disappears, and the first reserved image 9A1 moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was located. Thereafter, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 50 (C) is executed. Specifically, the first image IM1 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, and the second reserved image 9A2 moves to the position where the first reserved image 9A1 was. Further, the third reserved image 9A3 moves to the position where the second reserved image 9A2 was present. Further, the fourth reserved image 9A4 moves to the position where the third reserved image 9A3 was present. Thereafter, with the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the hold icon addition display shown in FIG. 50 (D) is executed. Specifically, the fifth reserved image 9A5 is displayed at the position where the fourth reserved image 9A4 was present.

[Hold icon display effect B]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon display effect B. The hold icon display effect B differs from the hold icon display effect A of FIG. 50 in the positional relationship between the four hold images 9A1 to 9A4. In the four hold display in FIG. 51A, the display screen 7a includes a first hold image 9A1, a second hold image 9A2, a third hold image 9A3, a fourth hold image 9A4, and the hold image 9C. The fourth image IM4 and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed.

  The fourth image IM4 is a substantially staircase image, and four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are arranged side by side at substantially equal intervals. As a result, the second reserved image 9A2 and the third reserved image 9A3 have the same position in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the first reserved image 9A1, the fourth reserved image 9A4, and the second reserved image 9A2 are different from each other in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen 7a. That is, the second reserved image 9A2 is positioned above the first reserved image 9A1, and the fourth reserved image 9A4 is positioned above the second reserved image 9A2. The size of the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 is smaller than that of the reserved image 9C. The upper end of the reserved image 9C is located above the display screen 7a from the upper end of the first reserved image 9A1, and is positioned below the display screen 7a from the upper end of the second reserved image 9A2. is doing. The four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 have different positions in the horizontal direction (left-right direction) of the display screen 7a. Here, in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a, the first reserved image 9A1, the second reserved image 9A2, the third reserved image 9A3, and the fourth reserved image 9A4 are arranged at substantially equal intervals from the left side.

  The reserved image 9C is in contact with the left side of the fourth image IM4. The first movable combination 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the reserved image 9C and the fourth image IM4 are visible through the first movable combination 14. In FIG. 51A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner.

  After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the reserved digest effect shown in FIG. 51 (B) is executed. Specifically, the reserved image 9C disappears, and the first reserved image 9A1 moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was located. Thereafter, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 51 (C) is executed. Specifically, the second reserved image 9A2 moves to the position where the first reserved image 9A1 was present. Further, the third reserved image 9A3 moves to the position where the second reserved image 9A2 was present. Further, the fourth reserved image 9A4 moves to the position where the third reserved image 9A3 was present. Thereafter, with the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the hold icon addition display shown in FIG. 51 (D) is executed. Specifically, the fifth reserved image 9A5 is displayed at the position where the fourth reserved image 9A4 was present.

[Hold icon display effect C]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon display effect C. The hold icon display effect C differs from the hold icon display effect A of FIG. 50 in the positional relationship between the four hold images 9A1 to 9A4. In the four hold display of FIG. 52 (A), the first hold image 9A1, the second hold image 9A2, the third hold image 9A3, the fourth hold image 9A4, and the hold image 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. The fifth image IM5 and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed.

The fifth image IM5 is a substantially slope-like image, and four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are arranged side by side at substantially equal intervals. This
The four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 have different positions in the vertical direction (up and down direction) of the display screen 7a. That is, the second reserved image 9A2 is positioned above the first reserved image 9A1, the third reserved image 9A3 is positioned above the second reserved image 9A2, and the fourth reserved image 9A4 is the third It is located above the reserved image 9A3. The size of the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 is smaller than that of the reserved image 9C. The upper end of the reserved image 9C is located above the display screen 7a from the upper end of the first reserved image 9A1, and is positioned below the display screen 7a from the upper end of the second reserved image 9A2. is doing. The four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 have different positions in the horizontal direction (left-right direction) of the display screen 7a. Here, in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a, the first reserved image 9A1, the second reserved image 9A2, the third reserved image 9A3, and the fourth reserved image 9A4 are arranged at approximately equal intervals from the left side.

  The reserved image 9C is in contact with the left side of the fifth image IM5. The first movable combination 14 is in the first mode, and the reserved image 9C and the fifth image IM5 are partially visible through the first movable combination 14. In FIG. 52 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed.

  After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the reserved digest effect shown in FIG. 52 (B) is executed. Specifically, the reserved image 9C disappears, and the first reserved image 9A1 moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was located. Thereafter, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 52 (C) is executed. Specifically, the second reserved image 9A2 moves to the position where the first reserved image 9A1 was present. Further, the third reserved image 9A3 moves to the position where the second reserved image 9A2 was present. Further, the fourth reserved image 9A4 moves to the position where the third reserved image 9A3 was present. Thereafter, with the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the hold icon addition display shown in FIG. 52 (D) is executed. Specifically, the fifth reserved image 9A5 is displayed at the position where the fourth reserved image 9A4 was present.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a hold icon display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the display screen 7a includes a first reserved image 9A1, a second reserved image 9A2, a third reserved image 9A3, and a fourth reserved image 9A4. Is displayed, the first hold image 9A1 and the second hold image 9A2 have different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a, and the third hold image 9A3 and the fourth hold image 9A4 have the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. The position in is different. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second reserved image 9A2 displayed on the display screen 7a and the third reserved image 9A3 are in the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. . According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the first reserved image 9A1 and the fourth reserved image 9A4 displayed on the display screen 7a are equal in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the first reserved image 9A1 is smaller than the reserved image 9C. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the first hold image 9A1, the second hold image 9A2, the third hold image 9A3, and the fourth hold displayed on the display screen 7a. The image 9A4 has different positions in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modified example of the above-mentioned hold icon display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 and the reserved image 9C have a circular shape. However, the shape of these reserved images can be any shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved image 9C is larger in size than the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4. However, the size of the reserved image 9C may be the same as or smaller than the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4. Further, the shapes and colors of the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 may be different from each other.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the reserved image 9C is covered by the first movable accessory 14. However, the reserved image 9C may not be covered with the first movable accessory 14. Similarly, the second image IM2, the fourth image IM4, and the fifth image IM5 may not be covered by the first movable accessory 14.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth hold icon,
When the first holding icon, the second holding icon, the third holding icon, and the fourth holding icon are displayed on the display means, the first holding icon and the second holding icon are displayed on the display unit. The position of the means in the first direction is different, and the third hold icon and the fourth hold icon are different in the position of the display means in the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon displayed on the display means have the same position in the first direction of the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
The first hold icon displayed on the display means and the fourth hold icon have the same position in the first direction of the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is the reserved image,
The first hold icon is smaller than the hold image;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-4,
The first hold icon, the second hold icon, the third hold icon, and the fourth hold icon displayed on the display unit are different from each other in the position of the display unit in the second direction. Yes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the hold icon visual recognition difficult effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. This on-hold icon visual difficulty effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect or a reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon visual difficulty effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[On-hold icon visual difficulty A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon visual difficulty production A. In the hold icon visual difficulty effect A, the hold digest effect of FIG. 53 (A) is executed. Specifically, four hold images 9A, the hold image 9C, the first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first image IM1 is a substantially semicircular image, and four reserved images 9A are arranged at substantially equal intervals around the circumference of the first image IM1. The size of the four reserved images 9A is smaller than that of the reserved image 9C. The second image IM2 is a horizontally long and substantially rectangular image provided on both sides of the first image IM1, and the reserved image 9C is in contact therewith. The first movable combination 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 is visible through the first movable combination 14.

  When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after the change display, the reserved image 9C disappears as shown in FIG. 53A, and the leftmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A. Moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was present. Thereafter, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 53 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first image IM1 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, and the reserved image 9A that is second from the left moves to the leftmost position. Further, the reserved image 9A that is third from the left moves to the second position from the left. Further, the rightmost reserved image 9A also moves to the left by one. That is, the first image IM1 rotates as the reserved image 9A is shifted. Then, variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  During the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon fade-out effect shown in FIG. 53 (C) is executed. Here, the hold image 9 </ b> A and the first image IM <b> 1 fade out from the display screen 7 a and become difficult to visually recognize. Specifically, the reserved image 9A and the first image IM1 gradually become thinner, so that it becomes difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 do not fade out from the display screen 7a. As the hold image 9A and the first image IM1 become gradually thinner, the hold icon visual difficulty effect shown in FIG. 53 (D) is executed. That is, due to the hold icon fade-out effect, the hold image 9 </ b> A and the first image IM <b> 1 become difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 do not become difficult to visually recognize.

[On-hold icon visual difficulty B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon visual difficulty rendering B. The hold icon visual difficulty effect B is different from the hold icon visual difficulty effect A of FIG. 53 in the aspect of the first image IM1. 54A, the display screen 7a includes four reserved images 9A, the reserved image 9C, the first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed. The first image IM1 is a rectangular frame image, and four reserved images 9A are arranged one by one in the frame. Again, the hold image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1. The size of the four reserved images 9A is smaller than that of the reserved image 9C. The second image IM2 is a horizontally long and substantially rectangular image provided on both sides of the first image IM1, and the reserved image 9C is in contact therewith. The first movable combination 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 is visible through the first movable combination 14.

  When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after the variable display, the reserved image 9C disappears as shown in FIG. 54A, and the leftmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A. Moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was present. Thereafter, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 54 (B) is executed. Specifically, the frame inside the first image IM1 moves to the left by a predetermined distance, and the reserved image 9A that is second from the left moves to the leftmost position together with the frame. Further, the reserved image 9A that is third from the left moves to the second position from the left. Further, the rightmost reserved image 9A also moves to the left by one. A frame image that does not contain the reserved image 9A appears from the right end toward the left at the right end of the first image IM1. In other words, the first image IM1 slides with the shift of the held image 9A. Then, variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  While the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed, the hold icon fade-out effect shown in FIG. 54 (C) is executed. Here, the hold image 9 </ b> A and the first image IM <b> 1 fade out from the display screen 7 a and become difficult to visually recognize. Specifically, the hold image 9 </ b> A and the first image IM <b> 1 move downward, so that it becomes difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 do not fade out from the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the first image IM1 move downward, whereby the hold icon visual difficulty effect shown in FIG. 54 (D) is executed. That is, due to the hold icon fade-out effect, the hold image 9 </ b> A and the first image IM <b> 1 become difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 do not become difficult to visually recognize.

[On-hold icon visual difficulty C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon visual difficulty effect C. The hold icon visual difficulty effect C differs from the hold icon visual difficulty effect A of FIG. 53 in the aspect of the first image IM1. In the reserved digest effect of FIG. 55 (A), the display screen 7a includes four reserved images 9A, the reserved image 9C, the first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed. The first image IM1 is an image representing a conveyor (belt conveyor), and four reserved images 9A are arranged on the conveyor at substantially equal intervals. That is, also here, the hold image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1. The size of the four reserved images 9A is smaller than that of the reserved image 9C. The second image IM2 is a horizontally long substantially rectangular image provided along the lower end of 7a, and the reserved image 9C and the first image IM1 are in contact with each other. The first movable combination 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 is visible through the first movable combination 14.

  When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed after the variable display, as shown in FIG. 55A, the reserved image 9C disappears, and the leftmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A. Moves to the position where the reserved image 9C was present. Thereafter, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 55 (B) is executed. Specifically, the conveyor of the first image IM1 is driven, and the reserved image 9A that is second from the left moves to the leftmost position. Further, the reserved image 9A that is third from the left moves to the second position from the left. Further, the rightmost reserved image 9A also moves to the left by one. In other words, the first image IM1 performs the driving operation with the shift of the held image 9A. Then, variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  During the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon fade-out effect shown in FIG. 55 (C) is executed. Here, the hold image 9 </ b> A and the first image IM <b> 1 fade out from the display screen 7 a and become difficult to visually recognize. Specifically, a rectangular third image IM3 appears from the lower right of the display screen 7a and covers the reserved image 9A and the first image IM1, and becomes gradually difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 are not covered with the third image IM3 and do not fade out from the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the first image IM1 are covered with the third image IM3, whereby the hold icon visual difficulty effect shown in FIG. 55 (D) is executed. That is, due to the hold icon fade-out effect, the hold image 9 </ b> A and the first image IM <b> 1 become difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 do not become difficult to visually recognize.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a hold icon visual difficult production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 to FIG. 55, the hold image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1 in a state where the first image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The production and the second production in which the first image IM1 gradually becomes difficult to visually recognize can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the second effect, the first image IM1 gradually becomes thin, and thus it becomes difficult to visually recognize. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the first image IM1 operates in accordance with the movement of the hold image 9A while the hold image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1. The third effect can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the first effect, the reserved image 9C is the second image IM2 in a state where the second image IM2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed so as to touch at least a part. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the second effect, the second image IM2 and the reserved image 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the first image IM1 is gradually visually recognized. On the other hand, the second image IM2 and the reserved image 9C are not in a difficult-to-view state. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the above-mentioned holding | maintenance icon visual difficulty production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C have a circular shape. However, the shape of these reserved images can be any shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved image 9C is larger than the reserved image 9A. However, the size of the reserved image 9C may be the same size as the reserved image 9A or may be smaller than these. Further, the shape and color of the reserved image 9A may be different from each other.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the reserved image 9C is covered by the first movable accessory 14. However, the reserved image 9C may not be covered with the first movable accessory 14. Similarly, the second image IM2 may not be covered with the first movable accessory 14.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
A first effect in which the hold icon is displayed on the first image in a state where the first image is displayed on the display means;
A second effect in which the first image gradually becomes difficult to visually recognize; and
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
In the second effect, the first image becomes difficult to visually recognize as it becomes gradually thinner.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
In a state where the hold icon is displayed on the first image, a third effect in which the first image operates in accordance with the movement of the hold icon can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is the reserved image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
In the first effect, the reserved image is displayed in contact with at least a part of the second image in a state where the second image is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect C2-4,
In the second effect, the second image and the reserved image are displayed on the display means, and the first image gradually becomes difficult to visually recognize, while the second image and the relevant image are displayed. The hold image does not become difficult to view.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The decorative symbol variation display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. This decorative symbol variation display effect is during the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also referred to simply as “special symbol”) (during one variation display). , Gaming state is normal state, high probability state, short time state, electric Chu support (the state where the electric Chu 22 is frequently opened and easy to win the second starting port 21, hereinafter referred to as "electric support") And so on.

[Decorative design variation display effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect A.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 56A, a decorative symbol variation start effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol is displayed in the right symbol display area. 8R is displayed. The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in parallel at the same height as shown in FIG. 56A, and fluctuate so as to scroll downward as shown by the arrows YL and YR. . The middle decorative symbol 8C is located above the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise as indicated by an arrow YC. In the decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at the lost symbol arrangement (“589”). The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the order that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and the middle decorative symbol 8C stops last.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), a decorative symbol reach effect is executed. In this decorative symbol reach production, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at the jackpot symbol arrangement in the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C indicates the reach state that is changing. In this example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at “9”, and the middle decorative symbol 8C indicates that the arrow YC is changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), the medium decoration symbol display position change effect is executed. This medium decorative symbol display position change effect shows how the display position of the medium decorative symbol 8C changes downward from the reach symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 56B in the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Yes. More specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R indicate the reach symbol arrangement at the display position shown in FIG. 56 (B). On the other hand, the middle decorative design 8C is a position that is lowered downward from the display position shown in FIG. 56B as indicated by the arrow YD, and is lower than the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. The display position changes to the position. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise at the lowered position.

That is, in the decorative symbol variation display effect A shown in FIG. 56, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are more variable than the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variation before reaching reach. When the variable display is performed on the upper side and the reach is formed by the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, the display position of the middle decorative symbol 8C is changed and the lower decorative symbol 8R and the right decorative symbol 8R are below. Use to change the display.
That is, in the decorative symbol variation display effect A, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbols change in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the middle decorative symbol 8C as the second decorative symbol When the first decorative symbol is reached as a predetermined symbol arrangement, the display position of the variable display is changed.

[Decoration pattern display effect B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect B.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the decorative symbol variation start / holding digest effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In the decorative symbol variation start / hold digest effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left symbol display area 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, the middle symbol pattern 8C is displayed in the central symbol display area, and the symbol design area in the right is displayed. The right decorative design 8R is displayed. The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in parallel at the same height as shown in FIG. 57A, and fluctuate so as to scroll downward as shown by arrows YL and YR. . The middle decorative symbol 8C is located above the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise as indicated by an arrow YC. In the decorative symbol variation start / holding digest effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at the lost symbol arrangement (“589”). The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the order that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and the middle decorative symbol 8C stops last.
In the decorative symbol change start / holding digest effect, the hold effect image HG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. The hold effect image HG is displayed in an arc shape, and a hold icon indicating the number of hold of the special symbol is displayed in the display area. In FIG. 57A, the first hold H1 and the second hold H2 are displayed as the hold icons. In addition, the hold icon HT is displayed on the left side of the hold effect image HG. The hold effect image HG rotates counterclockwise as indicated by the arrow YH1 when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change. Therefore, the hold icon in the display area of the hold effect image HG also rotates counterclockwise. When the hold effect image HG rotates, the first hold H1 moves to the position of the hold icon HT as shown by the arrow YH2, and simultaneously, the hold icons in the display area of the hold effect image HG are shifted one by one. (For example, the second hold H2 is moved to the display position of the first hold H1, and the other third hold and fourth hold are the same). FIG. 57 (A) shows a state when the decoration pattern starts to change in a state where there are three holds.
That is, in the decorative symbol change start / holding digest effect, when the decorative symbol changes, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R change in the vertical direction as indicated by the arrows YL and YR, and the middle decorative symbol 8C As shown by the arrow YC, the direction changes along the arc and counterclockwise, and the hold icon moves in the direction along the arc and counterclockwise as shown by the arrow YH1. That is, the medium decorative symbol 8C and the hold icon move in directions opposite to each other.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), a decorative symbol reach effect is executed. In this decorative symbol reach production, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at the jackpot symbol arrangement in the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C indicates the reach state that is changing. In this example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at “9”, and the middle decorative symbol 8C indicates that the arrow YC is changing. Further, in this decorative symbol reach production, the number of reserved special symbols indicates that the third reserved H3 and the fourth reserved H4 are increased (increased by two) from the number shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), a medium decoration symbol display position change effect is executed. This medium decorative symbol display position change effect shows how the display position of the medium decorative symbol 8C changes downward from the reach symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 57B in the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Yes. More specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R indicate the reach symbol arrangement at the display position shown in FIG. On the other hand, the medium decorative design 8C is a position that descends from the display position shown in FIG. 57 (B) in a direction approaching the holding icon (holding effect image HG) directly below as shown by the arrow YD. The display position changes to a position lower than the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise at the lowered position.

That is, in the decorative symbol variation display effect B shown in FIG. 57, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R vary vertically, and the middle decorative symbol 8C follows the arc. The hold icon moves in the counterclockwise direction that is the direction along the arc and in the opposite direction to the center decoration symbol 8C. In addition, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed before reaching reach, and the middle decorative symbol 8C displays a variation on the upper side of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol are displayed. When a reach is formed with the symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C changes in the display position and descends in a direction approaching the holding icon (holding effect image HG) side, more than the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. Display the fluctuation on the lower side.
That is, in the decorative symbol variation display effect B, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbols are changed in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the middle decorative symbol 8C as the second decorative symbol is The hold icon moves in the left-right direction as the third direction, which is the opposite direction to the second direction, and the first decorative symbol is reached as a predetermined symbol array. When it becomes, the 2nd decoration symbol becomes a structure which the display position of a fluctuation | variation display changes in the direction approaching the holding | maintenance icon side.

[Decorative design change display effect C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect C.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect C, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation start / hold digest effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In the decorative symbol variation start / hold digest effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left symbol display area 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, the middle symbol pattern 8C is displayed in the central symbol display area, and the symbol design area in the right is displayed. The right decorative design 8R is displayed. The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in parallel at the same height as shown in FIG. 5A, and fluctuate so as to scroll downward as indicated by arrows YL and YR. The middle decorative symbol 8C is located above the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise as indicated by an arrow YC. In the decorative symbol variation start / holding digest effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at the lost symbol arrangement (“589”). The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the order that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and the middle decorative symbol 8C stops last.
In the decorative symbol change start / holding digest effect, the hold effect image HG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. The hold effect image HG is displayed in an arc shape, and a hold icon indicating the number of hold of the special symbol is displayed in the display area. In FIG. 58A, first hold H1 and second hold H2 are displayed as hold icons. In addition, the hold icon HT is displayed on the left side of the hold effect image HG. The hold effect image HG rotates counterclockwise as indicated by the arrow YH1 when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change. Therefore, the hold icon in the display area of the hold effect image HG also rotates counterclockwise. When the hold effect image HG rotates, the first hold H1 moves to the position of the hold icon HT as shown by the arrow YH2, and simultaneously, the hold icons in the display area of the hold effect image HG are shifted one by one. (For example, the second hold H2 is moved to the display position of the first hold H1, and the other third hold and fourth hold are the same). FIG. 58 (A) shows a state in which the decoration symbol change is started in a state where there are three holds.
That is, in the decorative symbol change start / holding digest effect, when the decorative symbol changes, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R change in the vertical direction as indicated by the arrows YL and YR, and the middle decorative symbol 8C As shown by the arrow YC, the direction changes along the arc and counterclockwise, and the hold icon moves in the direction along the arc and counterclockwise as shown by the arrow YH1. That is, the medium decorative symbol 8C and the hold icon move in directions opposite to each other.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), a decorative symbol reach effect is executed. In this decorative symbol reach production, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at the jackpot symbol arrangement in the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C indicates the reach state that is changing. In this example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at “9”, and the middle decorative symbol 8C indicates that the arrow YC is changing. In this decorative symbol reach production, the number of reserved special symbols indicates that the number of the third reserved H3 and the fourth reserved H4 is increased (increased by two) from the number shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), a medium decoration symbol display position change effect is executed. In this medium decorative symbol display position change effect, the display position of the medium decorative symbol 8C changes downward from the reach symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 58 (B) in the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Yes. More specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R indicate the reach symbol arrangement at the display position shown in FIG. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed at a position that has been lowered from the display position shown in FIG. 58B in a direction approaching the downward holding icon (holding effect image HG) side, as indicated by an arrow YD. Changes.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), the medium decoration symbol variation effect is executed. In the middle decoration symbol variation effect, the variation display mode of the middle decoration symbol 8C after the middle decoration symbol display position variation effect shown in FIG. 58 (C) is executed is shown. The middle decorative pattern 8C fluctuates so as to rotate and scroll counterclockwise at the lowered position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 58D, the middle decorative symbol 8C varies through the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. Therefore, due to the change in the middle decorative symbol 8C, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are partially invisible with the middle decorative symbol 8C. Further, when the middle decorative symbol 8C reaches almost the middle between the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C is positioned at substantially the same height as the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R. In the middle decorative design variation effect, “8” is positioned between the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, “9” is overlapped with the left decorative design 8L, and “7” is on the right. A state where the decorative design 8R overlaps is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are completely stopped at the jackpot symbol array “999” as a result of the middle decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 58 (D) being executed. In addition, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the letters “big hit!” Are displayed. This notifies that the jackpot has been confirmed.
Here, in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the jackpot symbol arrangement, as shown by the horizontal line HL, the middle decorative symbol 8C is positioned at substantially the same height as the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R. Stop in parallel. In other words, when the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes a losing pattern arrangement without breaking, as shown in FIG. 58A, the middle decorative pattern 8C stops above the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the reach is stopped. When the lost symbol arrangement and the jackpot symbol arrangement are obtained, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R are arranged in a straight line and stopped.

In other words, in the decorative symbol variation display effect C shown in FIG. 58, when the reach is formed by the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, the display position of the middle decorative symbol 8C changes and the hold icon (hold) The effect image HG) is lowered in a direction approaching the side, fluctuates through the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R at this lowered position, and is horizontally aligned between the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. Stop.
That is, the decorative symbol variation display effect C is such that when the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbols reach the predetermined symbol arrangement, the medium decorative symbol 8C as the second decorative symbol is: The first decorative design passes through the front side of the first decorative design and is arranged in a straight line with the first decorative design.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative symbol variation display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbols are changed in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the second decorative symbols are changed. The middle decorative symbol 8C changes in the left-right direction as the second direction, and when the first decorative symbol is reached as a predetermined symbol arrangement, the second decorative symbol is displayed at the display position of the variable display. The configuration is changed. According to this configuration, when the reach is reached, the display position of the variable display of the second decorative symbol is changed, so that when the reach occurs, the player must face the game with great expectation. Can do. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbols change in the vertical direction as the first direction when the decorative symbols start to change. However, the medium decorative design 8C as the second decorative design changes in the left-right direction along the arc as the second direction, and the hold icon is the third direction that is opposite to the second direction. It is configured to move in the left-right direction along the arc. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol starts to change, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the hold icon move in different directions in different directions, so that the player starts changing the decorative symbol. You can enjoy the effects of various movements at the time. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbols change in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the second decorative symbols The medium decorative design 8C changes in the left-right direction along the arc as the second direction, and the hold icon moves in the left-right direction along the arc as the third direction opposite to the second direction. When the first decorative symbol has reached reach as a predetermined symbol arrangement, the second decorative symbol is configured such that the display position of the variable display changes in a direction approaching the hold icon side. According to this configuration, when the reach is reached, the second decorative symbol changes in a direction in which the display position of the variable display approaches the holding icon side, and the second decorative symbol and the holding icon approach each other. Since the player moves along the arc in the opposite direction, the player can greatly enjoy the effects of the movement of the second decorative symbol and the hold icon during the reach. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, when the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbols reach the predetermined symbol arrangement, The middle decorative design 8C passes through the front side of the first decorative design, and is arranged in a straight line with the first decorative design. According to this configuration, when the reach is reached, the second decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is closed up, so that the player can concentrate on the variable display of the second decorative symbol to determine whether or not to win But I can be angry. Furthermore, in a state where the second decorative symbol is stopped, it stops in line with the first decorative symbol, so that the determined symbol arrangement becomes very easy to see, and the player confirms the easily determined symbol arrangement. be able to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decoration design fluctuation display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are changed in the vertical direction, and the middle decorative design 8C is changed in the horizontal direction. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R may change in the left-right direction, and the middle decorative design 8C may change in the vertical direction. In short, the direction of change between the symbols other than the final stop symbol and the final stop symbol may be different directions.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, when reach is reached, the display position of the middle decorative symbol 8C changes while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when reaching reach, the display position of the middle decorative symbol 8C does not change, and the display position may be changed while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, when reaching reach, the display position of the middle decorative symbol 8C is in a state where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped, Although the display position is changed to a position that is lowered in a direction approaching the holding icon (holding effect image HG) directly below, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when reaching reach, the middle decorative symbol 8C may move closer to the hold icon side while swinging downward. Alternatively, the display position may be raised so that the medium decorative symbol 8C approaches the reserved icon side and the reserved icon also approaches the medium decorative symbol 8C side.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, when reaching reach, the middle decorative symbol 8C changes through the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the left decorative symbol 8L. The right decorative design 8R is partially invisible with the middle decorative design 8C, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the reach is reached, the middle decorative symbol 8C changes through the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R so that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R cannot be seen at all. Also good. In this case, only the medium decorative symbol 8C may be enlarged and displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, when reaching and the display position of the middle decorative symbol 8C is lowered to the holding icon (holding effect image HG) side, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the holding icon ( Although a predetermined interval is formed between the holding effect image HG), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the display position of the middle decorative symbol 8C is lowered due to reach, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the holding icon (holding effect image HG) may contact or partially overlap.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine provided with a decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable symbol display of a decorative symbol,
The decorative design display means includes:
At least the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be variably displayed.
The first decorative pattern varies in a first direction;
The second decorative design fluctuates in a second direction and stops after the first decorative design;
When the first decorative symbol has a predetermined symbol arrangement, the display position of the variable display of the second decorative symbol changes.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C3-2]
It has a display means that can display the hold icon,
The display means moves the hold icon in a third direction that is opposite to the second direction when the decoration symbol starts to change,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C3-3]
When the first decorative symbol is in the predetermined symbol arrangement, the display position of the variable display changes in a direction in which the second decorative symbol approaches the holding icon side.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C3-4]
The first decorative design is a left and right decorative design, the second decorative design is a medium decorative design,
The first direction is a vertical direction, and the second direction and the third direction are directions along an arc.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-2 or aspect C3-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C3-5]
When the first decorative symbol has the predetermined symbol arrangement, the second decorative symbol passes along the front side of the first decorative symbol and is aligned with the first decorative symbol in a straight line. Stop,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4, characterized in that.

  Hereinafter, the hold corresponding effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. This on-holding effect can be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display.

[Direction A for Hold]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the hold corresponding effect A.
First, in the hold corresponding effect A, the hold display effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C41 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C41 is a display area for displaying a hold icon, and a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C are displayed. The hold display area C41 is divided into five so as to store four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C. In the hold display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), a corresponding area display effect is executed. In this corresponding area display effect, a hold corresponding area C42 corresponding to the hold display area C41 is displayed. The hold corresponding area C42 is provided adjacent to the hold display area C41, and more specifically, is connected to the upper part of the hold display area C41. The hold corresponding area C42 includes four areas respectively corresponding to the four sections storing the first hold icon 9A in the hold display area C41.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), a corresponding region selection effect is executed. In the corresponding area selection effect, a plurality of effects options are variably displayed in any of the four areas of the hold corresponding area C42. This option includes a display that suggests a pending change, a display that suggests a reach that will develop in the future, a display that suggests a chance up such as “super hot” or “chance”, a display that suggests a jackpot, etc. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In this reserved change suggestion effect, the options that have been changed in the corresponding region selection effect in the reserved corresponding region C42 are stopped, and a display indicating the reserved change is performed. In the example of FIG. 59D, the display suggesting the pending change is expressed as “holding change”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the hold change effect is executed. In the hold change effect, display is performed to change the hold icon for the first hold icon 9A in the section of the hold display area C41 corresponding to the area where the display indicating the hold change is performed in the hold corresponding area C42. . In this case, the color of the first hold icon 9A is changed to red or the like. A plurality of types of colors for which the hold icon changes may be prepared as blue, yellow, green, and a specification with different jackpot expectations.
Note that FIGS. 59C to 59E are effects with at least the same variation.

[Holding effect B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the on-holding effect B.
First, in the hold corresponding effect B, the hold display effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C41 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C41 is a display area for displaying a hold icon, and a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C are displayed. The hold display area C41 is divided into five so as to store four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C. In the hold display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60B, a corresponding area display effect is executed. In this corresponding area display effect, a hold corresponding area C42 corresponding to the hold display area C41 is displayed. The hold corresponding area C42 is provided adjacent to the hold display area C41, and more specifically, is connected to the upper part of the hold display area C41. The hold corresponding area C42 includes four areas respectively corresponding to the four sections storing the first hold icon 9A in the hold display area C41.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60C, a corresponding area selection effect is executed. In the corresponding area selection effect, a plurality of effects options are variably displayed in any of the four areas of the hold corresponding area C42. This option includes a display that suggests a pending change, a display that suggests a reach that will develop in the future, a display that suggests a chance up such as “super hot” or “chance”, a display that suggests a jackpot, etc. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60D, a reach suggesting effect is executed. In this reach suggestion effect, the options that have fluctuated in the corresponding region selection effect in the hold corresponding region C42 are stopped, and a display that suggests a reach effect to be developed in the future is performed. In the example of FIG. 60D, the display indicating the reach effect is represented as “super reach A”, that is, the reach effect to be developed in the future is the super reach effect, and the super reach in the super reach effect. Reach A is indicated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60E, a super reach effect is executed. In this super reach effect, an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is performed. This super reach production is performed with a variation different from the variation in which the reach suggestion effect in FIG. 60D is performed. Specifically, in the reach suggestion effect, a display that suggests the reach effect of the hold corresponding area C42 is displayed. The first hold icon 9 </ b> A in the section of the hold display area C <b> 41 corresponding to the performed area is performed with the change that has been put on hold.

[Holding effect C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the on-holding effect C.
First, in the hold corresponding effect C, the hold display effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C41 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C41 is a display area for displaying a hold icon, and a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C are displayed. The hold display area C41 is divided into five so as to store four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C. In the hold display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), a corresponding area display effect is executed. In this corresponding area display effect, a hold corresponding area C42 corresponding to the hold display area C41 is displayed. The hold corresponding area C42 is provided adjacent to the hold display area C41, and more specifically, is connected to the upper part of the hold display area C41. The hold corresponding area C42 includes one area corresponding to the four sections storing the first hold icon 9A in the hold display area C41.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), a corresponding region selection effect is executed. In this corresponding area selection effect, a plurality of options are variably displayed in the holding corresponding area C42. This option includes a display that suggests a pending change, a display that suggests a reach that will develop in the future, a display that suggests a chance up such as “super hot” or “chance”, a display that suggests a jackpot, etc. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), a reach suggesting effect is executed. In this reach suggestion effect, the options that have fluctuated in the corresponding region selection effect in the hold corresponding region C42 are stopped, and a display that suggests a reach effect to be developed in the future is performed. In the example of FIG. 61D, the display indicating the reach effect is represented as “super reach A”, that is, the reach effect to be developed in the future is the super reach effect, and the super Reach A is indicated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), a super reach effect is executed. In this super reach effect, an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is performed. This super reach effect is performed with a change different from the change in which the reach suggestion effect in FIG. 61D is performed or the change different from the change in which the reach suggestion effect in FIG. 61D is performed.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of the effect of a hold corresponding | compatible effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold corresponding effect, a plurality of effect options are displayed in a variable manner in the hold corresponding area C42 corresponding to the hold display area C41, and one of the options is selected and selected. To do. According to this configuration, one of the plurality of effects is executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold corresponding effect, a plurality of effect options are variably displayed in the hold corresponding region C42 corresponding to the hold display region C41, and a display suggesting a change in hold is selected from the options. The selected production is executed. According to this configuration, since the display suggesting the change in hold is performed in the hold display area C41, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold corresponding effect, a plurality of effect options are variably displayed in the hold corresponding region C42 corresponding to the hold display region C41, and a display indicating a reach effect is selected from the options. The selected production is executed. According to this configuration, since the display indicating the reach effect is performed in the hold display area C41, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the hold corresponding effect, the hold corresponding area C42 is divided into a plurality of areas so as to correspond to the hold display area C41. According to this configuration, it is possible to display a suggestion of a predetermined effect in the hold corresponding area C42 in association with the hold icon in the hold display area C41, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold corresponding effect, the hold corresponding area C42 is arranged adjacent to the hold display area C41. According to this configuration, a suggestion display of a predetermined effect can be displayed in the hold corresponding area C42 in correspondence with the hold icon in the hold display area C41, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modified example of the production | presentation effect corresponding to a holding | maintenance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold change effect of the hold corresponding effect A, the target of the first hold icon 9A to be changed to hold corresponds to the region where the display indicating the hold change is performed in the hold corresponding region C42. Although the first hold icon 9A in the section of the hold display area C41 is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and the object of the first hold icon 9A to be changed is suggested to be changed in the hold corresponding area C42. It may be the first hold icon 9A other than the section of the hold display area C41 corresponding to the display area, or the second hold icon 9C.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the super reach effect of the hold corresponding effect B, the target of the reach effect suggested by the reach suggesting effect is displayed in the region where the display indicating the reach effect is performed in the hold corresponding region C42. Although the first hold icon 9A in the section of the corresponding hold display area C41 is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target for the reach effect suggested by the reach suggestion effect is reached in the hold corresponding region C42. It may be the first hold icon 9A other than the section of the hold display area C41 corresponding to the area where the display suggesting the effect is performed, or may be the second hold icon 9C.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the hold corresponding area C42 corresponding to the second hold icon 9C may be provided in the hold corresponding effects A to C.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold corresponding effects A and B, the hold corresponding area C42 is divided into four areas so as to correspond to the four sections storing the first hold icon 9A in the hold display area C41. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be divided into two or three regions.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the first mode in the hold corresponding area corresponding to the hold display area for displaying the hold,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the second mode in the hold corresponding area corresponding to the hold display area,
The third display effect is an effect of selecting one of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode and displaying the selected mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
As the display of the first aspect of the first display effect, including a hold change suggestion display that suggests that the hold changes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
As the display of the second aspect of the second display effect, including a reach suggestion display that suggests the type of reach effect performed in the variation,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The hold display area is divided into a plurality of areas including a first hold display area and a second hold display area,
The holding corresponding area includes a plurality of corresponding areas respectively corresponding to the plurality of areas divided in the holding display area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The hold corresponding area is disposed adjacent to the hold display area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the hold correspondence effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. This reserved jumping effect can be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display.

[Reserved jumping over effect A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the hold jump effect A.
First, in the hold jump effect A, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the hold display effect is executed. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C51 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C51 is a display area for displaying a hold icon, and a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C are displayed. The hold display area C51 is divided into five so that four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C can be stored. In the hold display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. This hold change suggestion effect is an effect in which the teammate character CRA throws the pseudo hold icon C52 having the same shape as the hold icon and moves it across the hold icon displayed in the hold display area C51. The pseudo hold icon C52 is red.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62C, a pending change suggestion image superimposing effect is executed. In the hold change suggestion image superimposing effect, the pseudo hold icon C52 thrown by the teammate character CRA in the hold change suggestion effect moves to the second hold icon 9C, and the pseudo hold icon C52 and the second hold icon 9C are superimposed. It is a production to do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the hold change effect is executed. In the hold change effect, display is performed in which the second hold icon 9C superimposed by moving the pseudo hold icon C52 is moved in the hold display area C51. In this case, the color of the second hold icon 9C is changed to the same red color as the pseudo hold icon C52. A plurality of types of colors for which the hold icon changes may be prepared as blue, yellow, green, and a specification with different jackpot expectations.
62A to 62D are effects with the same fluctuation.

[Reserved jumping over effect B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the hold jump effect B.
First, in the hold jump effect B, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the hold display effect is executed. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C51 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C51 is a display area for displaying a hold icon, and a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C are displayed. The hold display area C51 is divided into five so that four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C can be stored. In the hold display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. This hold change suggestion effect is an effect in which the teammate character CRA throws the pseudo hold icon C52 having the same shape as the hold icon and moves it across the hold icon displayed in the hold display area C51. The pseudo hold icon C52 is red.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the hold change suggestion image disappearance effect is executed. In this hold change suggestion image disappearance effect, the pseudo hold icon C52 thrown by the teammate character CRA in the hold change suggestion effect passes over the second hold icon 9C, and the pseudo hold icon C52 disappears from the screen. The pseudo hold icon C52 may disappear from the screen without passing through the second hold icon 9C. For example, the pseudo hold icon C52 may disappear from the screen passing between the second hold icon 9C and the first hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the hold non-change effect is executed. In the hold non-change effect, the pseudo hold icon C52 does not act in the hold display area C51, and neither the second hold icon 9C nor the first hold icon 9A changes hold.
63A to 63D are effects with the same fluctuation.

[Reserved jumping over effect C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the hold jump effect C.
First, in the hold jump effect B, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the hold display effect is executed. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C51 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C51 is a display area for displaying a hold icon, and a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C are displayed. The hold display area C51 is divided into five so that four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C can be stored. In the hold display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. In this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. This hold change suggestion effect is an effect in which the teammate character CRA throws the pseudo hold icon C52 having the same shape as the hold icon and moves it across the hold icon displayed in the hold display area C51. The pseudo hold icon C52 is red.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the hold change suggestion image disappearance effect is executed. In this hold change suggestion image disappearance effect, the pseudo hold icon C52 thrown by the teammate character CRA in the hold change suggestion effect passes over the second hold icon 9C, and the pseudo hold icon C52 disappears from the screen. The pseudo hold icon C52 may disappear from the screen without passing through the second hold icon 9C. For example, the pseudo hold icon C52 may disappear from the screen passing between the second hold icon 9C and the first hold icon 9A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the hold non-change effect is executed. In the hold non-change effect, the pseudo hold icon C52 does not act in the hold display area C51, and neither the second hold icon 9C nor the first hold icon 9A changes hold.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In the hold change suggestion effect, the teammate character CRA throws the pseudo hold icon C52 again and moves it so as to straddle the hold icon displayed in the hold display area C51.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), a pending change suggestion image superimposing effect is executed. In the hold change suggestion image superimposing effect, the pseudo hold icon C52 thrown by the teammate character CRA in the hold change suggestion effect moves to the second hold icon 9C, and the pseudo hold icon C52 and the second hold icon 9C are superimposed. It is a production to do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the hold change effect is executed. In the hold change effect, display is performed in which the second hold icon 9C superimposed by moving the pseudo hold icon C52 is moved in the hold display area C51. In this case, the color of the second hold icon 9C is changed to the same red color as the pseudo hold icon C52. A plurality of types of colors for which the hold icon changes may be prepared as blue, yellow, green, and a specification with different jackpot expectations.
64A to 64G are effects with the same fluctuation.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of holding and jumping effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the hold change suggestion effect is performed when the hold display area C51 is performed in the hold jump effect, and then the hold change effect is performed. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the hold change suggestion effect and the hold change effect.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the hold jump effect, the hold change suggestion image superposition effect is performed after the hold change suggestion effect, and then the hold change effect is performed. According to this configuration, since the hold change effect is performed after the hold change suggestion image superimposing effect, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the hold jump effect, the hold change suggestion image disappearance effect is performed after the hold change suggestion effect, and then the hold change effect is performed. According to this configuration, since the player is discouraged once by the reserved change suggestion image disappearing effect and then the reserved change effect is performed, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold jump effect, the hold change suggestion image disappearance effect is performed after the hold change suggestion effect, and then the hold change suggestion effect is performed again and then the hold change effect is performed. It has become. According to this configuration, since the player is discouraged once by the reserved change suggestion image disappearance effect and then the reserved change effect is performed via the reserved change suggestion effect, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pseudo hold icon C52 has the same shape as the hold icon in the hold jump effect. According to this configuration, the player can expect the hold change by looking at the pseudo hold icon C52, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modified example of the reservation jumping effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pseudo hold icon C52 is superimposed on the second hold icon 9C in the hold jumping effects A and C, and the second hold icon 9C changes hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo hold icon C52 may be superimposed on the first hold icon 9A, and the first hold icon 9A may change to hold.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold jump jump effects A to C, the pseudo hold icon C52 has the same shape as the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the pseudo hold icon C52 may have a different shape. Also in this case, the color of the pseudo hold icon C52 is set to a color to be changed on hold.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The hold icon includes an icon representing a hold and an icon representing the hold,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a hold display area for displaying the hold icon,
The second display effect is an effect of moving a hold change suggestion image that suggests a change of hold so as to straddle the hold icon displayed in the hold display area,
The third display effect is an effect of changing the hold,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect, the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of superimposing the hold change suggestion image on a specific hold icon displayed in the hold display area,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of temporarily erasing the hold change suggestion image outside the hold display area,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect 3,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and then the second display effect is performed again, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The hold change suggestion image has the same shape as the hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The decorative symbol display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative symbol display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect or before stop display. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decoration symbol display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. It is a display effect displayed on 7a.

[Decorative design display effect A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display effect A. In the decorative symbol display effect A, first, the decorative symbol rotation effect of FIG. 65 (A) is executed. Specifically, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the right decorative symbol 8R is larger than the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is larger than the left decorative symbol 8L. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R each rotate laterally with the vertical direction of the display screen 7a as the rotation axis. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode.

  Next, the decorative symbol right superimposed effect shown in FIG. 65 (B) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on a part of the left decorative symbol 8L, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on a portion of the middle decorative symbol 8C. Further, the right decorative design 8R is displayed larger than the middle decorative design 8C, and the middle decorative design 8C is displayed larger than the left decorative design 8L. A part of the right decorative design 8R is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is visible through the first movable accessory 14. The main surface of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is directed to the left. The main surface is a main surface on which numerals are represented in the three-dimensional decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and is formed on both sides of the end surface shown in FIG. Here, the direction in which the number “7” is facing means the left direction.

  Next, the decorative symbol left superimposed effect shown in FIG. 65 (C) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative design 8C overlaps with a part of the right decorative design 8R, and the left decorative design 8L overlaps with a part of the middle decorative design 8C. Further, the left decorative design 8L is displayed larger than the middle decorative design 8C, and the middle decorative design 8C is displayed larger than the right decorative design 8R. A part of the left decorative design 8L is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is visible through the first movable accessory 14. The main surface of each of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R faces rightward. That is, the direction in which the number “7” is facing means that it is the right direction.

  Next, the medium decoration symbol small display effect shown in FIG. 65 (D) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C smaller than both the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed without overlapping both the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. In addition, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed with their main surfaces in different directions. Here, the direction in which the number “7” faces is different. A part of each of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is visible through the first movable accessory 14.

  Next, the decorative symbol center superposition effect shown in FIG. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of each of the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L. Further, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed such that each part thereof protrudes from the display screen 7a. Next, a decorative design etc. shape effect shown in FIG. 65 (F) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in the same size and at equal intervals.

[Decorative design display effect B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display effect B. FIG. The decorative symbol display effect B differs from the decorative symbol display effect A of FIG. 65 in the aspects of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In the decorative symbol rotation effect of FIG. 66 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in the same manner as the decorative symbol display effect A of FIG. On the other hand, unlike the decorative symbol display effect A of FIG. 65, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R have the same size of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  Next, the decorative symbol right superposition effect shown in FIG. 66 (B) is executed. Specifically, in the same manner as the decorative design display effect A of FIG. 65, the middle decorative design 8C overlaps a part of the left decorative design 8L, and the right decorative design 8R overlaps and displays a part of the middle decorative design 8C. On the other hand, unlike the decorative symbol display effect A in FIG. 65, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R have the same size. Next, the decorative symbol left superimposed effect shown in FIG. 66 (C) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative design 8C overlaps with a part of the right decorative design 8R, and the left decorative design 8L overlaps with a part of the middle decorative design 8C. The size of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is equal.

  Next, the medium decoration symbol small display effect shown in FIG. 66 (D) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C smaller than both the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed without overlapping both the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. Unlike the decorative symbol display effect A in FIG. 65, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R have their main surfaces facing the same direction.

  Next, the decorative symbol center superimposed effect shown in FIG. 66 (E) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of each of the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L. Unlike the decorative symbol display effect A in FIG. 65, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R do not protrude from the display screen 7a. Next, the decorative design etc. shape effect shown in FIG. 66 (F) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in the same size and at equal intervals.

[Decorative design display effect C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display effect C. FIG. The decorative symbol display effect C differs from the decorative symbol display effect A of FIG. 65 in the aspects of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 67 (A), the decorative symbol reversal effect is executed. Specifically, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is equal. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each displayed with numbers that are horizontally reversed. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode.

  Next, the decorative symbol right superposition effect shown in FIG. 67 (B) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on a part of the left decorative symbol 8L, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on a portion of the middle decorative symbol 8C. The size of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is equal. The main surface of each of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R faces the front. Next, the decorative symbol left superimposed effect shown in FIG. 67 (C) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative design 8C overlaps with a part of the right decorative design 8R, and the left decorative design 8L overlaps with a part of the middle decorative design 8C. The size of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is equal. The main surface of each of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R faces the front.

  Next, the medium decoration symbol small display effect shown in FIG. 67 (D) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C smaller than both the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed without overlapping both the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. The main surface of each of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R faces the front.

  Next, the decorative symbol center superimposed effect shown in FIG. 67 (E) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of each of the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R do not protrude from the display screen 7a. Next, the decorative design etc. shape effect shown in FIG. 67 (F) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in the same size and at equal intervals.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a decoration symbol display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the right decorative design is displayed with the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R displayed on the display screen 7a. A first effect in which the middle decorative symbol 8C overlaps a part of 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L overlaps a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C. After the first effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. It is possible to execute the second effect in which the middle decorative symbol 8C smaller than both is displayed without overlapping the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, after the second effect, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of each of the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L. The third effect can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, in the first effect, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is larger than the right decorative symbol 8R. Is also displayed larger. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, in the second effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed with the orientations of the main surfaces different from each other. Is done. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, in the third effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are in a state where each part protrudes from the display screen 7a. Is displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the above-mentioned decoration design display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all “7”. However, the decorative symbol display effect can be executed even when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are numbers other than “7”. The decorative symbol display effect may be executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have different numbers.

[Modification 2]
The decorative design reversal effect of FIG. 67 (A) may be such that the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are reversed left and right even for a moment. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively rotated vertically or horizontally, and may be temporarily reversed. Alternatively, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol The design 8C and the right decorative design 8R may be rotated vertically or horizontally as a whole, and temporarily reversed horizontally.

[Modification 3]
The decorative symbol display effects in FIGS. 65 to 67 include effects such as a decorative symbol right superimposed effect, a decorative symbol left superimposed effect, a medium decorative symbol small display effect, a decorative symbol center superimposed effect, a shape effect such as a decorative symbol, etc. . However, some of these may not be included. Moreover, effects other than these effects may be included.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a left decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a medium decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a right decorative design,
In a state where the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are displayed on the display means, the middle decorative design overlaps a part of the right decorative design, and the left decorative design is part of the middle decorative design. A first effect in which symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner;
After the first effect, the second decoration pattern is displayed so that the middle decoration symbol smaller than both the left decoration symbol and the right decoration symbol is displayed without overlapping both the left decoration symbol and the right decoration symbol. Production and execution,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the middle decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap a part of each of the right decorative symbol and the left decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
In the first effect, the left decorative symbol is displayed larger than the middle decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol is displayed larger than the right decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
In the second effect, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are displayed with different main surface orientations, respectively.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-4,
In the third effect, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are displayed so that each part protrudes from the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the hit suggestion image display effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. This hit type suggestion image display effect can be executed, for example, during a decorative effect change effect during a rush hour. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hit type suggestion image display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Batch type suggestion image display effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the hit type suggestion image display effect A. In the hit type suggestion image display effect A, first, the decorative symbol variation effect of FIG. 68 (A) is executed. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the hit type suggestion image SH are displayed on the display screen 7a. The hit type suggestion image SH is an image that suggests the contents of a series of hit games at the time of rush. In other words, the hit type suggestion image SH is an image that suggests a jackpot type executed in the past. In FIG. 68A, three types of jackpot types “Super”, “Miracle”, and “Bonus” are displayed. In FIG. 68 (A), eight hit type suggestion images SH are displayed side by side in two rows, suggesting that eight jackpot games have been executed in the past. In FIG. 68A, the first to fifth jackpot types are displayed in the upper row, and the sixth to eighth jackpot types are displayed in the lower row. The hit type suggestion images SH are displayed in order from the left side to the right side near the center of the display screen 7a. The first movable combination 14 is in the first mode, and a part of the hit type suggestion image SH is visible through the first movable combination 14.

  The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shift from the variable display to the stop display as shown in the order of FIGS. 68 (A) to 68 (C). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so as to overlap a part of the hit type suggestion image SH as shown in FIGS. 68 (A) to 68 (C). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed partially overlapping with the hit type suggestion image SH even during the variable display shown in FIG. 68 (A), and partially during the stop display shown in FIG. 68 (C). The hit type suggestion image SH is displayed so as to overlap. After the decorative symbol stop display of FIG. 68 (C), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed again as shown in FIG. 68 (D). Also at this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so as to overlap a part of the hit type suggestion image SH.

[Hit type suggestion image display effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the hit type suggestion image display effect B. The hit type suggestion image display effect B is different from the hit type suggestion image display effect A in FIG. 68 in that the suggestion image IS1, the acquired ball number image BA1, and the remaining period suggestion image are displayed. In the decorative symbol variation effect of FIG. 69 (A), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hit type suggestion image SH, the suggestion image IS1, the acquired ball count image BA1, and the first image IM1 are displayed. The second image IM2 and the third image IM3 are displayed. The hit type suggestion image SH is the same as the hit type suggestion image display effect A in FIG. Here, nine hit type suggestion images SH are displayed side by side in two rows, suggesting that nine jackpot games have been executed in the past. The suggestion image IS1 is an image that suggests right-handedness to the player. The acquired ball number image BA1 represents the number of balls acquired by the player in a series of winning games.

  The first image IM1 is an image representing a specific target, and here represents the shape of a smile. A specific object means anything that can be recognized as one independent object. In addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures and characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, Etc. are also included. The first image IM1 is displayed on the second image IM2. Here, the first image IM1 is displayed at the left end on the second image IM2. The second image IM2 is a substantially rectangular figure that is long in the horizontal direction, and is displayed below the display screen 7a. The third image IM3 is a hold icon (hold image) indicating the number of holds, and is displayed on the second image IM2. Here, a reserve number of 4 is suggested.

  The first image IM1 moves rightward on the second image IM2. The first image IM1 and the second image IM2 function as remaining period suggestion images that suggest the remaining period until the predetermined period expires depending on the position of the first image IM1 with respect to the second image IM2. That is, it indicates that the predetermined period has expired when the first image IM1 is positioned at the right end of the second image IM2. The predetermined period is, for example, a period from the start to the end of one variation pattern.

  The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a. A part of each of the suggestion image IS1, the acquired number-of-balls image BA1, the first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the hit-type suggestion image SH is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable It is visible through the accessory 14.

  The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shift from the variable display to the stop display as shown in the order of FIGS. 69 (A) to 69 (C). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so as to overlap a part of the hit type suggestion image SH as shown in FIGS. 69 (A) to 69 (C). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed partially overlapping with the hit type suggestion image SH even during the variable display shown in FIG. 69 (A), and partially during the stop display shown in FIG. 69 (C). The hit type suggestion image SH is displayed so as to overlap. After the decorative symbol stop display of FIG. 69 (C), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed again as shown in FIG. 69 (D). Also at this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so as to overlap a part of the hit type suggestion image SH.

[Hit type suggestion image display effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the hit type suggestion image display effect C. The hit type suggestion image display effect C is different from the hit type suggestion image display effect A of FIG. 68 in that the second decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r and the remaining period suggestion image are displayed. In the decorative design variation effect of FIG. 70 (A), the display screen 7a includes a decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R, a hit type suggestion image SH, a second decorative design 8l, 8c, 8r, and a first image IM1. A second image IM2 and a third image IM3 are displayed. The hit type suggestion image SH is the same as the hit type suggestion image display effect A in FIG. Here, three hit type suggestion images SH are displayed side by side in a row, suggesting that three big hit games have been executed in the past. Here, during the period from the first variation display of the second decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r to the stop display, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R perform a pseudo-continuous effect that repeats a plurality of variation displays and temporary stop displays. Do it.

  The first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the third image are the same as the hit type suggestion image display effect B in FIG. That is, the first image IM1 and the second image IM2 function as remaining period suggestion images that suggest the remaining period until the predetermined period expires depending on the position of the first image IM1 with respect to the second image IM2. Here, it corresponds to the period from the first variation display to the stop display of the second decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r.

  The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a. A portion of each of the second decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, the first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the hit type suggestion image SH is covered with the first movable combination 14, and the first movable combination It can be visually recognized through the object 14.

  The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R perform pseudo-continuous effects as shown in the order of FIGS. 70 (A) to 70 (D). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so as to overlap a part of the hit type suggestion image SH as shown in FIGS. 70 (A) to 69 (D). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed partially overlapping with the type suggestion image SH even during the variable display shown in FIG. 70 (A) and partially during the stop display shown in FIG. 70 (B). The hit type suggestion image SH is displayed so as to overlap.

[Example of effects]
Below, the effect example of a hit classification suggestion image display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, in the state where the hit type suggestion image SH suggesting the jackpot type executed in the past is displayed on the display screen 7a, the hit type suggestion image is displayed. It is possible to execute the first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so as to overlap a part of SH. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the second effect in which the fluctuating effect is started in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are hit and at least partly overlap the type suggestion image SH. Can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in the first effect, the remaining period suggestion images IM1 and IM2 indicating the remaining period until the predetermined period expires are displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the first effect, the acquired ball number image BA1 indicating the number of balls acquired by the jackpot executed in the past is displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, at least a part of the acquired ball number image BA1 is visible through the first movable accessory 14. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A variation of the hit type suggestion image display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The content of the hit type suggestion image SH shown in FIGS. 68 to 70 is not limited to the above, and can be any hit type. Further, the shape and arrangement of the hit type suggestion image SH are not limited to the above, and can be any shape and arrangement.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. However, the first movable accessory 14 may be in other modes. For example, the first movable accessory 14 may be stationary at the home position as the third aspect and may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, or may cover the entire display screen 7a as the second aspect.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hit type suggestion image that suggests a jackpot type executed in the past,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative design,
In a state where the hit type suggestion image is displayed on the display means, it is possible to execute a first effect in which the decorative design is displayed overlapping a part of the hit type suggestion image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
A second effect can be executed in which a fluctuating effect is started in a state where at least a part of the decorative design overlaps the hit type suggestion image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2,
In the first effect, a remaining period suggestion image indicating a remaining period until the predetermined period expires is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3,
In the first performance, an acquired ball number image indicating the number of balls acquired by a jackpot executed in the past is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-4 further includes
It has a permeable accessory,
At least a part of the acquired ball number image is visible through the accessory,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The toreach effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This toreach effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable symbol special display.

[Tourach Production A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the tour reach effect A.
First, in the reach reach effect A, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), a change start effect is executed. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the first reach effect is executed. In the first reach production, the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R stop at the same design, and a reach state in which the decorative design 8C is fluctuating is formed. In the reach state, the decorative design 8C moves from left to right. Production. In FIG. 71 (B), the reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the second reach effect is executed. In this second reach effect, the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R stop at the same design, and a reach state in which the decorative design 8C is fluctuating is formed. In the reach state, the decorative design 8C moves from right to left. Production. In FIG. 71C, a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.
71A to 71C show the same fluctuation effects. Therefore, in the same variation, the first reach effect and the second reach effect are executed, in other words, two different reach effects are executed.

[Tourach Production B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the tour reach effect B. FIG.
First, in the reach reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), a change start effect is executed. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the first reach effect is executed. In the first reach production, the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R stop at the same design, and a reach state in which the decorative design 8C is fluctuating is formed. In the reach state, the decorative design 8C moves from left to right. Production. In FIG. 72 (B), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at a symbol suggesting a pseudo-continuous symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo-suggesting symbol).

  Note that the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that is executed at the start of fluctuation change or during reach effect, for example, an effect that repeats the effect of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative symbol, or a predetermined symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol An effect that repeats an effect that temporarily stops at least a part, an effect that repeats an effect that temporarily stops a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-relation such as “× 2”, “× 3”, “pseudo”, Includes an effect to execute a decorative design variation effect. The same applies to the pseudo-continuous effects shown below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72D, the second reach effect is executed. In this second reach effect, the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R stop at the same design, and a reach state in which the decorative design 8C is fluctuating is formed. In the reach state, the decorative design 8C moves from right to left. Production. In FIG. 72 (D), the reach state using 7 symbols is formed.
72A to 72D show the same fluctuation effects. Therefore, in the same variation, the first reach effect and the second reach effect are executed, in other words, two different reach effects are executed.

[Tourach Production C]
FIG. 73 is a view for explaining the to reach effect C.
First, in the reach reach effect C, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the first reach effect is executed. In the first reach production, the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R stop at the same design, and a reach state in which the decorative design 8C is fluctuating is formed. In the reach state, the decorative design 8C moves from left to right. Production. In FIG. 73 (B), the reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73C, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at a symbol suggesting a pseudo-continuous symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo-suggesting symbol).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the second reach effect is executed. In the second reach production, the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R stop at the same design, and a reach state in which the decorative design 8C is fluctuating is formed. In the reach state, the decorative design 8C moves upward from below. Production. In FIG. 73D, a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.
73A to 73D show the same fluctuation effects. Therefore, in the same variation, the first reach effect and the second reach effect are executed, in other words, two different reach effects are executed.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of a to reach effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first reach effect and the second reach effect are performed with the same variation in the to reach effect. According to this configuration, the reach effect of the two modes is performed with the same variation, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the second reach effect is performed after the first reach effect in the to reach effect. According to this structure, since two reach productions are performed in order, the interest of a game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the to reach effect, the first reach effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol fluctuates in the left direction, and in the second reach effect, the decorative symbol fluctuates in the right direction. According to this configuration, the decorative design fluctuates in different directions in the two reach effects, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the to reach effect, the first reach effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol fluctuates in the left direction, and in the second reach effect, the decorative symbol fluctuates in the right direction. According to this configuration, in the two reach effects, the decorative pattern fluctuates in opposite directions, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment,
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing a pseudo-ream,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the first display effect, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a to reach production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative pattern 8C that fluctuates in the first reach effect moves from left to right, and the medium decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates in the second reach effect moves from right to left. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative pattern 8C that fluctuates in the first reach effect moves from right to left, and the decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates in the second reach effect moves from left to right, so that two different reach effects in the same change. It is good also as a structure which realizes, and in the same change, the decoration design 8C which fluctuates in the 1st reach production moves from the bottom to the top, and the decoration design 8C which fluctuates in the 2nd reach production moves from the top to the bottom, It is good also as a structure which implement | achieves two different reach productions. Also, the decorative pattern 8C that fluctuates in the first reach effect moves in front of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R that stop, and the middle decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates in the second reach effect moves behind the decorative symbols 8L and 8R that stop. By doing so, it is good also as a structure which implement | achieves two different reach effects in the same fluctuation | variation.
In addition, in the same variation, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R that form the reach state in the first reach effect and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R that form the reach state in the second reach effect are different. It is good also as a structure which implement | achieves two different reach productions.
Furthermore, the decorative design 8C that fluctuates in the first reach effect moves randomly, and the decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates in the second reach effect also moves randomly, thereby realizing two different reach effects in the same change. Also good.
Note that the order of the first reach effect and the second reach effect may be reversed, and the first reach effect may be executed after the second reach effect.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of forming the reach state of the first aspect using a decorative design,
The second display effect is an effect of forming the reach state of the second aspect different from the first aspect using the decorative design,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The reach state of the first aspect includes a stopped decorative design and a changing decorative design, and the changing decorative design is a mode of moving in the first direction,
The reach state of the second aspect includes a stopped decorative symbol and a changing decorative symbol, and the variable decorative symbol moves in a second direction different from the first direction. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The second direction is opposite to the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing a pseudo-ream,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the first display effect, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This special symbol variation effect can be executed, for example, when the special symbol variation display is started.

[Special design variation production A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation effect A.
First, in the special symbol variation effect A, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), the first symbol variation effect is executed. In the first symbol variation effect, the variation effect is executed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R composed only of the numeric symbols. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are composed only of the numerical symbols are also referred to as normal decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), the first symbol pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The first symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol in a state where the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped. The decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R are in a state where the numbers of the numerical design are different from each other.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the second symbol variation effect is executed. In the second symbol variation effect, the variation effect is executed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in which the viewing character image D41 is added to the numeric symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in which the viewing character image D41 is added to the numeric symbols are also referred to as first special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The first special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state where the viewing character image D41 is added to all the symbols even if the numeric symbols are different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the second symbol pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This second symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol while the first special decorative symbol 8L and the first special decorative symbol 8R are stopped. The first special decorative design 8L and the first special decorative design 8R are in a state in which the numbers of the numerical designs are different from each other.
74A to 74D show the same fluctuation effects.

[Special design variation effect B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation effect B.
First, in the special symbol variation effect B, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), the first symbol variation effect is executed. In the first symbol variation effect, the variation effect is executed using the first special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), the first symbol pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The first symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol in a state where the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped. The decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R are in a state where the numbers of the numerical design are different from each other.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), the second symbol variation effect is executed. In this second symbol variation effect, the variation effect is executed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in which the name character image D42 of the perspective character is further added to the first special decorative symbol in which the perspective character image D41 is added to the numeric symbol. Is done. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, in which the viewing character name image D42 is further added to the first special decorative symbols, are also referred to as second special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The name image D42 in FIG. 75C is represented as “OARO”. In the special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the name image D42 is added to all symbols even if the numeric symbols are different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75D, the second symbol pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The second symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol while the second special decorative symbol 8L and the second special decorative symbol 8R are stopped. The second special decorative design 8L and the second special decorative design 8R are in a state where the numbers of the numerical designs are different from each other.
Note that FIGS. 75A to 75D show the same variation effects.

[Special design variation effect C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation effect C.
First, in the special symbol variation effect C, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the first symbol variation effect is executed. In the first symbol variation effect, the variation effect is executed using the third special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The third special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured such that a numeric symbol and a character image are added, and the added character is different for each numeric symbol. For example, a viewing character image D41 is added to a decorative design with a number design of 7, and an enemy character D43 is added to a decorative design with a number design of 6.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the first symbol pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This first symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol while the third special decorative symbol 8L and the third special decorative symbol 8R are stopped. The decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R are in a state where the numbers of the numerical design are different from each other.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), the second symbol variation effect is executed. In the second symbol variation effect, the variation effect is executed using the fourth special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The fourth special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured such that a numeric symbol, a character image, and a name image are added, and the character and name image added for each numeric symbol are different. For example, a viewing character image D41 and a name image D42 are added to a decorative design with a number design of 7, and an enemy character D43 and a name image D44 are added to a decorative design with a number design of 6. The name image D44 is expressed as “OORO”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), the second symbol pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This second symbol pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol in a state where the fourth special decorative symbol 8L and the fourth special decorative symbol 8R are stopped. The fourth special decorative design 8L and the fourth special decorative design 8R are in a state in which the numbers of the numerical designs are different by one.
Note that FIGS. 76A to 76D show the same fluctuation effects.

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of effects of production.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R of the first symbol variation effect includes one or more elements, and the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, of the second symbol variation effect, 8R includes a new element not included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first symbol variation effect in addition to the elements included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first symbol variation effect. ing. According to this structure, since two variation effects are performed by the decorative design from which an element differs, the interest of a game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation effect, the second symbol variation effect is executed after the first symbol variation effect. According to this configuration, since the second symbol variation effect is performed after the first symbol variation effect, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first symbol variation effect and the second symbol variation effect are performed in the same variation in the special symbol variation effect. According to this configuration, since the first symbol variation effect and the second symbol variation effect are performed with the same variation, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation effect B, in the second symbol variation effect, an element (viewing character image D41) included in the decorative symbol of the second symbol variation effect in the special symbol variation effect is used. A predetermined effect is performed (modification 3 to be described later). According to this structure, since the effect using the elements included in the decorative design is performed, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the special symbol variation effect, the variation effect by the decorative symbol including the numeric symbol is performed, the variation effect by the decorative symbol including the numeric symbol and the view character image D41 is performed, and then the numerical symbol and the viewpoint Fluctuation effect by a decorative design including the character image D41 and the name image D42 of the teammate character is performed (modified example 1 described later). According to this configuration, since three variation effects with different numbers of elements are performed, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation effect, the normal decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the first special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the second special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the third special ornament. Three or more of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the fourth special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be combined to realize a variation effect within the same variation.
For example, within the same variation, an effect is performed using the normal decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R, then an effect is performed using the first special decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R, and then the second special decorative symbol. You may make it produce using 8L, 8C, and 8R.
In addition, within the same variation, an effect is performed using the normal decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, then an effect is performed using the third special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and then the fourth special decorative symbol. You may make it produce using 8L, 8C, and 8R.
Further, within the same variation, the effect is performed using the normal decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, then the effect is performed using the first special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and then the second special decorative symbol. An effect may be performed using 8L, 8C, and 8R, and then an effect may be performed using the third special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.
Moreover, you may rearrange the order of these productions. For example, within the same variation, an effect is performed using the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, then an effect is performed using the first special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and then the normal decorative symbols 8L , 8C, 8R may be used to produce effects.
Further, the combined effects of these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be made to correspond to each mode. For example, in mode A, the special symbol variation effect A may be performed, in the mode B, the special symbol variation effect B may be performed, and in the mode C, the special symbol variation effect C may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the special symbol variation effect is performed within the same variation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed separately for a plurality of variations. For example, in the special symbol variation effect A, FIGS. 74 (A) and (B) may be performed within the same variation, and FIGS. 74 (C) and (D) may be performed within the next variation.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation effects A to C, a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect, pseudo-continuous effect, chance increase) using an image including elements included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Production, prefetching production, jackpot suggesting production) may be performed. For example, the chance-up effect may be performed using the viewing character image D41 included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the second symbol variation effect A of the special symbol variation effect A. In this case, a chance-up effect using the viewing character image D41 may be performed after the second symbol variation effect.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect D4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative design in a first aspect,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the decorative design in the second mode different from the first mode,
The decorative design of the first aspect includes one or more elements,
The decorative design of the second aspect includes a new element not included in the decorative design of the first aspect in addition to the elements included in the decorative design of the first aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 2,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect performed using an image including an element included in the decorative design of the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying the decorative design in a third aspect different from the second aspect,
The decorative design of the third aspect includes a new element not included in the decorative design of the second aspect in addition to the elements included in the decorative design of the second aspect,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The following suggestive effects other than the deviation will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. The suggestion effect other than the disconnection can be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display.

[Indication other than outliers A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining a suggestion effect A other than a break.
First, in the suggestion effect A other than the deviation, the variation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 77 (A). This variation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the off symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This off symbol arrangement stop effect is an effect of stopping the off symbol array that represents a deviation using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 77 (B), 7 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8L, 6 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8R, and a special symbol is used for the decorative symbol 8C. The off-set symbol arrangement including this special symbol suggests other than out-of-out. Specifically, it is suggested that the out-of-order symbol array including this special symbol is a big hit in any of the holdings apart from the out-of-game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot symbol array stop effect is an effect of stopping the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 77 (D), 7 symbols are formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the jackpot symbol arrangement.
77 (A) and 77 (B) are effects relating to the fluctuation, and FIGS. 77 (C) and (D) are effects relating to the next fluctuation. 77 (C) and (D) may be an effect relating to the next variation with respect to the variation effect, or may be an effect relating to the next variation next to the variation, and the variation. In contrast, it may be an effect related to the next change. That is, FIG. 77 (C) and FIG. 77 (D) are executed with a big hit after stopping the off-set symbol arrangement including the special symbol in FIG. 77 (B). In this case, after the effect relating to the fluctuations in FIGS. 77A and 77B is performed, the predetermined time is required until the effect relating to FIGS. 77C and 77D (the effect of winning a big hit) is performed. If there is a variation, the outlier symbol arrangement including the special symbol is also stopped and displayed.

[Suggested production B other than outliers]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining a suggestion effect B other than a break.
First, in the suggestion effect B other than the deviation, the variation effect is executed as shown in FIG. This variation effect changes the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R at the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and changes the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and various characters appear. This is an effect of performing various displays. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are formed larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the off symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This off symbol arrangement stop effect is to stop the off symbol arrangement representing the off using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R at the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and at the top right of the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. This is an effect that stops the symbol arrangement by using. In FIG. 78 (B), 7 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8L, and 6 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8C and the decorative symbol 8R as the off-set symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, as the detachable symbol array using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R, 7 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 9L, 6 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 9R, and a special symbol is used for the decorative symbol 9C. The out-of-order symbol arrangement by the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R including the special symbols suggests other than out-of-phase. Specifically, it is suggested that the out-of-order symbol arrangement by the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R including the special symbol is a big hit in any of the holdings apart from the out-of-phase.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation effect changes the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R at the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and changes the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and various characters appear. This is an effect of performing various displays.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot symbol array stop effect stops the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R at the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C and 9R on the upper right of the display screen 7a. It is an effect that stops the jackpot symbol arrangement using. In FIG. 78 (D), 7 symbols are formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R as the jackpot symbol arrangement.

  78 (A) and 78 (B) are effects relating to the fluctuation, and FIGS. 78 (C) and 78 (D) are effects relating to the next fluctuation. 78 (C) and 78 (D) may be an effect related to the next variation with respect to the variation effect, or may be an effect related to the next change next to the variation, or the variation. In contrast, it may be an effect related to the next change. That is, in FIG. 78 (B), after the off symbol arrangement including the special symbols is stopped, FIGS. 78 (C) and (D) are executed with a big hit variation. In this case, after the effects related to the fluctuations shown in FIGS. 78A and 78B are performed, there is a predetermined time until the effects related to FIGS. 78C and 78D (a big hit effect) are performed. If there is a variation, the outlier symbol arrangement including the special symbol is also stopped and displayed.

[Suggested production C other than detachment]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the suggestion effect C other than the deviation.
First, in the suggestion effect C other than the deviation, the variation effect is executed as shown in FIG. This variation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the off symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This off symbol arrangement stop effect is an effect of stopping the off symbol array that represents a deviation using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 79 (B), 7 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8L, 6 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8R, and a special symbol is used for the decorative symbol 8C. The off-set symbol arrangement including this special symbol suggests other than out-of-out. Specifically, the outlier design array including this special symbol suggests that a pseudo-continuous effect occurs in any of the holdings, separately from the outage.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79D, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo continuous suggestion symbol while the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped.
79 (A) and 79 (B) are effects related to the change, and FIGS. 79 (C) and 79 (D) are effects related to the next change. 79 (C) and 79 (D) may be an effect relating to the next variation with respect to the variation effect, or may be an effect relating to the next variation next to the variation, and the variation. In contrast, it may be an effect related to the next change. That is, in FIG. 79 (B), after the off symbol arrangement including the special symbols is stopped, FIGS. 79 (C) and (D) are executed with a big hit variation. In this case, after the effects related to the fluctuations shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B are performed, there is a predetermined time period until the effects related to FIGS. 79C and 79D (a big hit effect) are performed. If there is a variation, the outlier symbol arrangement including the special symbol is also stopped and displayed.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of suggesting effects other than dissociation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the suggestion effect other than the outage, the outlier symbol array stop effect is performed after the variation effect, and the outlier symbol array that is stopped and displayed in the outlier symbol array stop effect has a predetermined suggestion other than the outage. Includes special designs to perform. According to this configuration, even if the off symbol arrangement is stopped, the predetermined suggestion is made by the special symbol, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R are variably displayed in the suggestion effects other than the detachment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed. According to this structure, since the variable display by two decoration symbols is performed, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the suggestion effect other than the loss, the lost symbol array including the special symbol is configured to include a display that suggests that there is a big hit in the hold. According to this configuration, it is suggested that there is a big hit in the hold by the off-line symbol arrangement, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the variation effect, after the change effect, the game machine 1 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol array including the special symbol, and is then stopped and displayed in the off symbol pattern including the special symbol in the next variation. According to this structure, since the predetermined suggestion by the special symbol is continued, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the suggestion effect B other than the loss, after the outlier symbol array stop effect including the special symbol, the big hit symbol array stop effect is performed in the next variation, and the special symbol is included in the jackpot symbol array. Is not included. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
In the following, a modified example of a suggestion effect other than a break is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the suggestion effects A to C other than the outage, the outlier symbol array including the special symbol is a pseudo-ream in any of the on-hold or on-hold as a suggestion other than the outage. Although this suggests that production will occur, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an out-of-order symbol array including special symbols is either a suggestion that a specific reach effect (for example, a reach reach effect or a premium reach effect) appears in any of the on-holds, or an on-hold as an indication other than the off-set In this case, it may be suggested that a specific character (for example, a premium character) appears.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the suggestion effect B other than the detachment, the detachable symbol array including the special symbols is formed only in the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, any one of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, or both of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R include a special symbol array including a special symbol. It is good also as a structure formed. In this case, in the case where an off symbol array including special symbols is formed on both the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, It may be a configuration that suggests that a state that is more advantageous to the player than a case in which an outlier symbol array including a special symbol is formed in any one of 8Rs may be used. For example, if an outlier design including special symbols is formed in both the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, it is suggested that there are two or more jackpots in the hold. You may do it.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the suggestion effects A to C other than the breakage, when there is a predetermined variation between the symbol pattern including the special symbol and before the big hit variation, In this case, the off symbol array including the special symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the off symbol array including the special symbol may not be stopped and displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect D5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of changing a decorative design,
The second display effect is an effect of stopping the decorative symbol in an off symbol arrangement that is one of a plurality of modes.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the decorative design may be stopped in the pattern arrangement of the first mode. ,
The outlier design array of the first aspect includes a predetermined suggestion display other than outliers,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of changing another decorative design larger than the decorative design,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed at the time of the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The outlier symbol arrangement of the first aspect includes a display suggesting that there is a hold as the predetermined suggestion display,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed again in the next variation after the decorative design is stopped at the off-design pattern of the first mode, and then the second display effect is performed. And in the second display effect, the predetermined display is stopped at the off-design pattern of the first aspect including the specific design as the predetermined suggestion display,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of stopping the decorative symbol in a jackpot symbol arrangement,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed again in the next change after the decorative symbols are stopped at the off-design pattern of the first mode, and then the fourth display effect is performed. Done,
The gaming machine characterized in that the jackpot arrangement of the decorative symbols does not include the predetermined suggestion display.

  The decorative symbol movement effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative symbol movement effect can be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display.

[Decorated design movement effect A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol movement effect A.
First, in the decorative symbol movement effect A, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is executed. In this decorative pattern front movement reach production, the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R stop at the same design, and a reach state in which the decorative design 8C is fluctuating is formed. In the reach state, the decorative design 8C moves from left to right. This is an effect of moving the front side of the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R where the decorative design 8C is stopped. In FIG. 80B, a reach state using seven symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80C, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol while the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. The decorative symbol 8C is disposed adjacent to the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and stops between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R.
80A to 80C show the same fluctuation effects.

[Decorated design movement effect B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol movement effect B.
First, in the decorative symbol movement effect B, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is executed. In this decorative pattern front movement reach production, the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R stop at the same design, and a reach state in which the decorative design 8C is fluctuating is formed. In the reach state, the decorative design 8C moves from left to right. This is an effect of moving the front side of the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R where the decorative design 8C is stopped. In FIG. 81 (B), a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the decorative symbol backward movement reach effect is executed. In the decorative symbol rearward movement reach effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R stop at the same symbol, and a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is formed. In the reach state, the decorative symbol 8C moves from left to right. This is an effect of moving the decorative symbol 8L where the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and the rear side of the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 81C, a reach state using seven symbols is formed.
Note that, after the decorative symbol rearward movement reach effect of FIG. 81 (C), the decorative symbol frontward movement reach effect of FIG. 81 (B) may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol while the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. The decorative symbol 8C is disposed adjacent to the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and stops between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R.
81A to 81D show the same fluctuation effects.

[Decoration Pattern Movement Production C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol movement effect C.
First, in the decorative symbol movement effect C, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is executed. In this decorative pattern front movement reach production, the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R stop at the same design, and a reach state in which the decorative design 8C is fluctuating is formed. In the reach state, the decorative design 8C moves from left to right. This is an effect of moving the front side of the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R where the decorative design 8C is stopped. In FIG. 82 (B), the reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the decorative symbol rearward movement reach effect is executed. In the decorative symbol rearward movement reach effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R stop at the same symbol, and a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating is formed. In the reach state, the decorative symbol 8C moves from right to left. This is an effect of moving the decorative symbol 8L where the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and the rear side of the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 82C, a reach state using 7 symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82D, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol while the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. The decorative symbol 8C is disposed adjacent to the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and stops between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R.
82A to 82D show the same fluctuation effects.

[Example of effects]
Below, the effect example of a decoration symbol movement effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effect, the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is performed after the change start effect. According to this configuration, since the decorative symbol moves so as to pass in front of other decorative symbols, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effect, the decorative symbol 8C is passed through the front of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in a state where the reach state is formed with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, the decorative design 8C moves so as to pass in front of the decorative designs 8L and 8R, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effect, the moving direction of the decorative symbol 8C in the variation start effect is the downward direction, and the moving direction of the decorative symbol 8C in the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the movement of the decorative symbols, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effect B, the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is performed, and then the decorative symbol rearward movement reach effect is performed. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the movement of the decorative design and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effect, after the decorative symbol front movement reach effect, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed adjacent to the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decoration symbol movement effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effects A to C, the decorative symbol 8C is disposed adjacent to the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design 8C may be configured to be stopped away from the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effects A to C, the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is stopped when the decorative symbol 8C is in the reach state (the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol). Although it is configured to move in front of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at different symbols, the decorative symbol 8C may move in front of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effects A to C, the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is that when the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are in the stopped state, the decorative symbol 8C is changed to the decorative symbol 8L. Although it is configured to move in front of the decorative design 8R, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the decorative symbol 8C moves in front of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R when the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are moving may be employed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of variably displaying a plurality of decorative symbols including a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol,
The second display effect is an effect of stopping the first decorative symbol and moving the second decorative symbol so as to pass in front of the first decorative symbol,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D6-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The second display effect moves the second decorative symbol so as to pass in front of the first decorative symbol in a state where the reach state is formed by the decorative symbol including the first decorative symbol. Directing,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
In the first display effect, the variation direction of the second decorative design is the first direction,
In the second display effect, the moving direction of the second decorative symbol is a second direction different from the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect in which the first decorative symbol is stopped and the second decorative symbol is moved so as to pass behind the first decorative symbol.
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, one of the second display effect and the third display effect is performed, and then the other display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D6-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of stopping the second decorative symbol adjacent to the first decorative symbol in a stopped state,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and then the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The special pseudo-continuous effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This special pseudo-continuous effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable symbol display.

[Special pseudo-continuous production A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the special pseudo-continuous effect A.
First, in the special pseudo-continuous effect A, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the first pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This first pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol D72 while the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. The pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol D72 includes a NEXT image representing the continuation of the pseudo-continuous and a reach effect suggesting image D71. The reach effect suggestion image D71 represents a teammate character. In other words, the reach effect suggestion image D71 suggests the development of a reach effect in which the teammate character appears. That is, the reach effect suggestion image D71 represents the type of reach effect that will be developed in the future. Further, the reach effect suggestion image D71 is used as a background image of the pseudo continuous suggestion symbol D72. The reach effect suggestion image D71 is represented by a color based on blue.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83C, the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The second pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol D72A in a state where the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. Only the NEXT image is shown in the pseudo-link suggestion symbol D72A.

[Special Pseudo Continuous Production B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the special pseudo-continuous effect B.
First, in the special pseudo-continuous effect B, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the first pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This first pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol D72 while the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. The pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol D72 includes a NEXT image representing the continuation of the pseudo-continuous and a reach effect suggesting image D71. The reach effect suggestion image D71 represents a teammate character. In other words, the reach effect suggestion image D71 suggests the development of a reach effect in which the teammate character appears. That is, the reach effect suggestion image D71 represents the type of reach effect that will be developed in the future. Further, the reach effect suggestion image D71 is used as a background image of the pseudo continuous suggestion symbol D72. The reach effect suggestion image D71 is represented by a color based on blue.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84C, the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This second pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol D73 in a state where the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. The pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol D73 includes a NEXT image representing the continuation of the pseudo-continuous and a reach effect suggesting image D74. The reach effect suggestion image D74 represents an enemy character, in other words, suggests that it will develop into a reach effect in which the enemy character appears. That is, the reach effect suggestion image D74 represents the type of reach effect that will be developed in the future. Further, the reach effect suggestion image D74 is used as a background image of the pseudo continuous suggestion symbol D72. The reach effect suggestion image D74 is represented by a color based on red. The reach effect suggestion image D74 suggests that it will develop into a reach effect with a high degree of expectation for jackpots compared to the reach effect suggestion image D71. In other words, the color (red) of the reach effect suggestion image D74 suggests that the degree of jackpot expectation is higher than the color (blue) of the reach effect suggestion image D71.

[Special pseudo-continuous production C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the special pseudo-continuous effect C.
First, in the special pseudo-continuous effect C, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the first reach notice effect is executed. The first reach notice effect is an effect in which the reach notice image D75 is displayed. The reach notice image D75 gives a notice of a reach effect that will develop in the future. The reach notice image D75 shown in FIG. 85 (B) suggests that, as a reach notice, the OARO reach where a teammate character appears is developed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), the first pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This first pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol D72 while the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. The pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol D72 includes a NEXT image representing the continuation of the pseudo-continuous and a reach effect suggesting image D71. The reach effect suggestion image D71 represents a teammate character. In other words, the reach effect suggestion image D71 suggests the development of a reach effect in which the teammate character appears. That is, the reach effect suggestion image D71 represents the type of reach effect that will be developed in the future. This reach effect suggestion image D71 is linked to the reach notice image D75, and suggests that it will develop into an OARO reach in which an ally character appears together. Further, the reach effect suggestion image D71 is used as a background image of the pseudo continuous suggestion symbol D72. The reach effect suggestion image D71 is represented by a color based on blue.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the second reach notice effect is executed. The second reach notice effect is an effect in which the reach notice image D76 is displayed. The reach notice image D76 gives a notice of a reach effect that will develop in the future. The reach notice image D76 shown in FIG. 85 (D) suggests that the reach notice is developed into an OORO reach in which an enemy character appears.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This second pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol D73 in a state where the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. The pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol D73 includes a NEXT image representing the continuation of the pseudo-continuous and a reach effect suggesting image D74. The reach effect suggestion image D74 represents an enemy character, in other words, suggests that it will develop into a reach effect in which the enemy character appears. That is, the reach effect suggestion image D74 represents the type of reach effect that will be developed in the future. This reach effect suggestion image D74 is linked with the reach notice image D76 and suggests that it will develop into an OORO reach in which enemy characters appear together. Further, the reach effect suggestion image D74 is used as a background image of the pseudo continuous suggestion symbol D72. The reach effect suggestion image D74 is represented by a color based on red.

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of special pseudo-series effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first pseudo-series effect is performed in the special pseudo-series effect, and in the first pseudo-series effect, the pseudo-series suggestion symbol D72 indicating the pseudo-series effect is displayed, and the pseudo-series suggestion pattern is displayed. In D72, a reach effect suggestion image D71 that suggests different from the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. According to this configuration, since the reach effect suggestion image D71 that suggests different from the pseudo continuous effect is displayed in the pseudo continuous suggestion symbol D72, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-series effect B, the second pseudo-series effect is performed after the first pseudo-series effect. D73 is displayed, and a reach effect suggestion image D74 that suggests different from the pseudo continuous effect is displayed in the pseudo continuous suggestion symbol D73. According to this configuration, in the second simulated continuous effect in addition to the first pseudo continuous effect, the reach effect suggestion image D74 that suggests different from the pseudo continuous effect is displayed in the pseudo continuous suggestion pattern D73. Interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 used in the first pseudo continuous effect and the second pseudo continuous effect in the special pseudo continuous effect are images that indicate the type of reach effect. It is. According to this configuration, since the player can know the type of reach production, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effect, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 used in the first pseudo-continuous effect and the second pseudo-continuous effect are the pseudo-continuous effects. It is a background image of the suggestion symbol D72 or the pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol D73. According to this configuration, since the player can know the type of reach production from the background image, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 used in the first pseudo continuous effect and the second pseudo continuous effect are character images in the special pseudo continuous effect. According to this configuration, since the player can easily know the type of reach effect from the character image, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a special pseudo-continuous production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effect A, the reach effect suggestion image D71 is displayed as the background image of the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol D72 in the first pseudo-ream effect, and the reach effect suggestion is displayed in the second pseudo-ream effect. Although the pseudo-suggestion suggestion symbol D72A not including the image D71 is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there is a third pseudo-continuous effect, the reach effect suggestion image D71 is displayed as the background image of the pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol D72 in the second pseudo-continuous effect, and the reach effect suggestion image D71 is included in the third pseudo-continuous effect. You may make it display the pseudo | simulation continuous suggestion symbol D72A which is not.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effects A to C, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 displayed in the pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol D72 and the pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol D73 are specific reach effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a chance up suggestion image that suggests a chance up may be displayed, a jackpot suggestion image that suggests a jackpot may be displayed, or a pre-reading effect. A prefetch effect suggestion image that suggests may be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 are displayed as background images of the pseudo connect suggestion symbol D72 and the pseudo connect suggestion symbol D73 in the special pseudo continuous effects A to C. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 may be displayed as a part of the pseudo-link suggestion symbol D72 or the pseudo-link suggestion symbol D73. It may be displayed in front of the continuous suggestion symbol D72 and the pseudo-suggestion suggestion symbol D73, and the NEXT image may be in the background.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effects A to C, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 are character images, but the present invention is not limited to this, and character images Or other images such as landscape images.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect D7-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first pseudo-continuous effect,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second pseudo-continuous effect different from the first pseudo-continuous effect,
The first pseudo-continuous effect is an effect of displaying a first pseudo-continuous suggestion image that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect. In the first display effect, an effect different from the pseudo-continuous effect is included in the first pseudo-continuous suggestion image. The first specific suggestion image that suggests may be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D7-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The second pseudo-continuous effect is an effect of displaying a second pseudo-continuous suggestion image that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect,
In the combination effect, in the second display display, a second specific suggestion image that suggests an effect different from the pseudo continuous effect may be displayed in the second pseudo continuous suggestion image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The specific suggestion image is an image that suggests the type of reach production.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D7-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The specific suggestion image is a background image of the pseudo-continuous suggestion image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D7-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The specific suggestion image is a character image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the pseudo-continuous suggestion image use effects A and B will be described with reference to FIGS. This on-holding effect can be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display.

[Normal pseudo-continuous production]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the normal pseudo-continuous performance.
First, in the normal pseudo-continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), a change start effect is executed. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the first pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The first pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol while the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. The pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern includes a NEXT image D81 that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The second pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the pseudo-suggested symbol while the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the same symbol. This pseudo continuous suggestion symbol includes a NEXT image D81 that suggests a pseudo continuous effect.
86A to 86C are effects with the same fluctuation.

[Pseudo-continuous suggestion image use effect A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous suggestion image use effect A.
First, in the pseudo-continuous suggestion image use effect A, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), a change start effect is executed. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), a jackpot suggesting effect is executed. In this jackpot suggesting effect, the NEXT image D81 used in the normal pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. The NEXT image D81 functions as an image that suggests a jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), a reach effect is executed. In this reach production, the teammate character CRA is displayed and various actions are taken.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot symbol array stop effect is an effect of stopping the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 87 (D), 7 symbols are formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the jackpot symbol arrangement.
87A to 87D are effects with the same variation.

[Pseudo-suggested image use effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous suggestion image use effect B.
First, in the pseudo-continuous suggestion image use effect B, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), a change start effect is executed. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), a jackpot suggesting effect is executed. In this jackpot suggestion effect, the NEXT image D81 used in the normal pseudo-continuous effect is displayed, and the second movable accessory 15 is moved to be in the second mode (see FIG. 48). The NEXT image D81 functions as an image that suggests a jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), a reach effect is executed. In this reach production, the teammate character CRA is displayed and various actions are taken.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot symbol array stop effect is an effect of stopping the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 88 (D), 7 symbols are formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the jackpot symbol arrangement.
88 (A) to 88 (D) are effects with the same fluctuation.

[Example of effects]
Below, the effect example of a normal pseudo | simulation continuous effect and a pseudo | simulation continuous suggestion image use effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect using the NEXT image D81 is performed in the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and the jackpot-suggesting effect is executed using the NEXT image D81 in the simulated continuous suggestion image use effect. According to this configuration, the NEXT image D81 can have various actions, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot suggesting effect using the NEXT image D81 is performed in the pseudo continuous suggestion image use effect B, the second effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15. Like that. According to this configuration, the jackpot suggesting action of the NEXT image D81 can be further emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pseudo-continuous suggestion image use effect is performed in the fluctuation immediately after the end of the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the jackpot suggestion can be further emphasized by the appearance of the NEXT image D81, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used in a jackpot suggesting effect that suggests a jackpot in the pseudo-continuous suggestion image use effect. According to this configuration, the NEXT image D81 is used in a jackpot suggesting effect that suggests a jackpot, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used in the suggestion effect suggesting the gaming state in the pseudo continuous suggestion image use effect (Modification 1). According to this configuration, the NEXT image D81 is used in a suggestion effect that suggests a gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a normal pseudo | simulation continuous production | presentation and a pseudo | simulation continuous suggestion image use production | presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used as a jackpot suggestion in the pseudo-continuous suggestion image use effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the NEXT image D81 may be used as an indication of a chance-up effect, may be used as an indication of a prefetch effect, or may be used as an indication of a gaming state. In this case, when the NEXT image D81 suggests a chance up effect, the chance up effect is performed thereafter. Further, when the NEXT image D81 suggests a prefetching effect, the prefetching effect is performed thereafter. Further, when the NEXT image D81 suggests a gaming state, the gaming state is notified thereafter.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used as a jackpot suggestion in the pseudo-continuous suggestion image use effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the NEXT image D81 may be used as a chance-up effect, a prefetch effect, or a gaming state notification.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the pseudo-continuous suggestion image use effect may be performed in the fluctuation immediately after the jackpot game is finished (the first rotation after the jackpot game is finished), or may be performed in a short time. Alternatively, it may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect D8-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing a pseudo-continuous effect using a specific image,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a predetermined effect,
The predetermined effect is an effect using the specific image,
The specific image is an image suggesting at least a pseudo-continuous effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D8-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect in which an accessory effect using a predetermined accessory is performed,
A combination effect including the second display effect and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D8-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The predetermined performance is performed in a change immediately after the jackpot game ends.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D8-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect is a jackpot suggesting effect that suggests a jackpot,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D8-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The predetermined suggestion effect is a game state suggestion effect that suggests a game state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The full rotation effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This full-rotation effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable symbol display.

[Full rotation production A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the full rotation effect A. FIG.
First, in the full rotation effect A, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), a change start effect is executed. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), a reach effect is executed. In this reach production, the teammate character CRA is displayed and various actions are taken.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, a scroll effect is executed. In this scroll effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R scroll in the downward direction in the same symbol state (the state of the all eyes).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89D, a jackpot symbol stop effect is executed. This jackpot symbol array stop effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot by stopping the scrolling decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. In FIG. 89 (D), 7 symbols are formed using decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R as the jackpot symbol arrangement. Note that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have disappeared in the jackpot symbol stop effect.

  89 (A) to 89 (D) are effects with the same fluctuation. Further, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the variation start effect, the reach effect, the scroll effect, and the jackpot symbol stop effect are the same.

[Full rotation effect B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the full rotation effect B. FIG.
First, in the full rotation effect B, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), a change start effect is executed. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90B, a reach effect is executed. In this reach production, the teammate character CRA is displayed and various actions are taken.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90C, a scroll effect is executed. In this scroll effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R scroll in the downward direction in the same symbol state (the state of the all eyes).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90D, a jackpot symbol stop effect is executed. This jackpot symbol array stop effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R by stopping the scrolling decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. In this jackpot symbol array stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R also form a jackpot symbol array and are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 90 (D), 7 symbols are formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R as the jackpot symbol arrangement.

  90A to 90D are effects with the same variation. Further, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the variation start effect, the reach effect, the scroll effect, and the jackpot symbol stop effect are the same.

[Full rotation effect C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the full rotation effect C. FIG.
First, in the full rotation effect C, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 91 (A). This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), a reach effect is executed. In this reach production, the teammate character CRA is displayed and various actions are taken.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91C, the first scroll effect is executed. In this first scroll effect, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are scrolled downward in the same symbol state (grooved state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the same symbol state (respectively). It is an effect of scrolling downward in the state of the filter eye. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R, the symbol arrays may be scrolled in synchronization, or may be scrolled in synchronization.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the second scroll effect is executed. In the second scroll effect, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are scrolled in the same manner as the first scroll effect, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are scrolled in a state of being larger than the first scroll effect. is there. Note that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be scrolled in a state of being smaller than the first scroll effect. In addition, the symbol arrangements of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R may be scrolled in synchronization, or may be scrolled without being synchronized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), a jackpot symbol stop effect is executed. In this jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect, by stopping the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R to be scrolled, the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot is displayed using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R, and the scrolling decorative symbols 8L, 9L, 9R are displayed. By stopping 8C and 8R, it is an effect to display a jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. In FIG. 91 (D), 7 symbols are formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R as the jackpot symbol arrangement.

  91A to 91D are effects with the same fluctuation. Further, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the variation start effect, the reach effect, the scroll effect, and the jackpot symbol stop effect are the same.

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of effects of production.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the full rotation effect, the variation start effect is performed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R, and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are jackpot symbols. A scroll effect that scrolls in an array is performed. According to this configuration, since the scroll effect is executed using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game. Can do.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed when the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R are scrolled in the scroll effect in the full rotation effects A and B. . According to this configuration, attention can be paid to the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the full rotation effects B and C, the jackpot symbol array is stopped and displayed using both the decorative symbols 9L, 9C and 9R and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R in the jackpot symbol stop processing. I have to. According to this configuration, the jackpot can be firmly emphasized to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the size of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R is not changed in the full rotation effect. According to this configuration, attention can be paid to game effects other than the scroll effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the full rotation effect C, the size of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is changed from the first scroll effect to the second scroll effect. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the inflection of the decorative design.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the variation start effect, the reach effect, the scroll effect, and the jackpot symbol stop effect are the same in all rotation effects A to C. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be different from each other, or may be different only in some effects. For example, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the variation start effect and the reach effect may be different from the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the scroll effect and the jackpot symbol stop effect.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear at the time of the scroll effect in the full rotation effects A and B, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, At the time of the scroll effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may disappear for a moment. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be continuously displayed during the scroll effect.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect D9-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing an effect of changing the first decorative design,
The second display effect is an effect of changing a second decorative design smaller than the first decorative design,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a full rotation effect of scrolling in a state where the second decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol arrangement,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D9-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing a non-display effect that does not display the first decorative symbol,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D9-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol arrangement using the first decorative symbol, and further stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol arrangement using the second decorative symbol,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D9-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The size of the second decorative symbol in the second display effect and the size of the second decorative symbol in the third display effect do not change,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D9-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect in which the size of the first decorative design changes,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The countdown fluctuation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This countdown variation effect may be executed during a variation effect of a decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the countdown change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Is a display effect to be displayed.

[Countdown fluctuation effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect A. FIG. In the countdown variation effect A, first, the countdown display of FIG. 92 (A) is executed. Specifically, first, the numerical image IN1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The numerical image IN1 is a numerical value of a specific value, and is represented in Roman letters here. In this example, the numerical image IN1 is written in Roman letters, but may be written in other forms. Here, 4 is shown as a numerical value, but this is also an example, and the numerical value can be any value. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the forward direction changing effect shown in FIG. 92 (B) is executed. Specifically, after the numerical image IN1 is displayed, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. At this time, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move downward and start to change in the forward direction appearing from above the display screen 7a. The medium decorative design 8C has already been displayed in a variable manner.

  Next, the effect before the right decoration symbol stop shown in FIG. 92 (C) is executed. Specifically, in the state where the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed, the variation of the right decorative symbol 8R is decelerated. Then, after the right decorative symbol 8R having the same value as the numerical value stopped and displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L (here, “6”) is stopped and displayed, the player decelerates to the extent that the player thinks, and then FIG. The right decorative symbol sliding stop display shown in FIG. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R having the same numerical value as the numerical value stopped and displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L (here, “6”) is not stopped and displayed, and the next numerical value (here “5”) is stopped and displayed. Is done.

  Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 92 (E) is executed. Specifically, a numerical image IN2 having a numerical value that is decremented (subtracted) by 1 from the numerical image IN1 displayed in FIG. 92A is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image indicating 3 and is written in Roman letters as in the numerical image IN1.

  Next, the reverse direction fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 92 (F) is executed. Specifically, after the numerical image IN2 is displayed, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. At this time, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move upward and start to change in the reverse direction that appears from below the display screen 7a. The medium decorative design 8C has already been displayed in a variable manner.

  Next, the left-right decorative symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 92 (G) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R decelerate in parallel in a state where the middle decorative design 8C is variably displayed. At this time, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R have the same numerical value (here, “6”). Then, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, and the reach effect shown in FIG. 92 (H) is executed.

[Countdown variation effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect B. FIG. The countdown variation effect B is different from the countdown variation effect A of FIG. 92 in the form of the numerical image IN1. In the countdown display of FIG. 93A, a numerical image IN1 surrounded by a frame is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, although 1 is shown as a numerical value, this is also an example, and the numerical value can be an arbitrary value. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the forward direction changing effect shown in FIG. 93 (B) is executed. Here, the display of the numerical image IN1 is continued during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each move downward and start to change in the forward direction appearing from above the display screen 7a.

  93C is the same as the countdown variation effect A of FIG. 92 except that the display of the numerical image IN1 is continued. It is the same.

  Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 93 (E) is executed. Specifically, first, a numerical value image IN2 that is decremented (subtracted) from the numerical value image IN1 displayed in FIG. 93A is displayed on the display screen 7a surrounded by a frame. Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image indicating 0 (zero).

  Next, the reverse direction fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 93 (F) is executed. Here, the display of the numerical image IN1 is continued during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each move upward, and start to change in the reverse direction that appears from below the display screen 7a.

  93G is the same as countdown variation effect A in FIG. 92 except that the display of numerical image IN2 is continued.

[Countdown variation effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect C. In FIG. The countdown variation effect C is compared with the countdown variation effect A of FIG. 92, and the countdown variation effect B is displayed with the aspect of the numerical image IN1 and the specific image IMC compared with the countdown variation effect A of FIG. Is different. In the countdown display of FIG. 94A, the translucent numerical image IN1 and the specific image IMC are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the numerical image IN1 is written in Roman letters, but may be written in other forms. The numerical value can be any value. The specific image IMC is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smile. A specific object means anything that can be recognized as one independent object. In addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures and characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, Etc. are also included. The specific image IMC is displayed so as to overlap the semitransparent numerical image IN1. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the forward direction changing effect shown in FIG. 94 (B) is executed. Here, the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the medium decorative design 8C. That is, in the state in which the specific image IMC is displayed between the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move downward and appear in the forward direction from above the display screen 7a. The fluctuation starts at.

  The right decorative symbol stop effect in FIG. 94 (C) and the right decorative symbol slip stop display in FIG. 94 (D) count down in FIG. 92 except that the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the middle decorative symbol 8C. This is the same as the variation effect A.

  Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 94 (E) is executed. Specifically, first, a numerical value image IN2 that is decremented (subtracted) from the numerical value image IN1 displayed in FIG. 94A and the specific image IMC are displayed on the display screen 7a. . Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image indicating 3 in Roman letters, and is displayed in a semi-transparent manner like the numerical image IN1. The specific image IMC is displayed so as to overlap the semitransparent numerical image IN2.

  Next, the reverse direction fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 94 (F) is executed. Here, the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the medium decorative design 8C. That is, in a state where the specific image IMC is displayed between the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move upward and appear in the reverse direction that appears from below the display screen 7a. The fluctuation starts at.

  The effect before stoppage of the left and right decorative symbols in FIG. 94 (G) and the reach effect in FIG. 94 (H) are the same as the countdown variation effect A in FIG. 92 except that the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the middle decorative symbol 8C. It is the same.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of the countdown fluctuation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, after the first effect that the numerical image IN1 is displayed on the display screen 7a and the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. Can be executed with the second effect that is displayed in a variable manner. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, after the second effect, the third effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, and after the third effect. The fourth effect in which the numerical image IN2 decremented by 1 from the numerical image IN2 displayed in the first effect is displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, after the fourth effect, the reverse variation display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move in the direction opposite to the variation display is performed. The fifth effect can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the third effect, the reach effect by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not executed, and after the fifth effect, the decorative symbol 8L. , 8C, 8R, the reach effect is executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the fifth effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move from the lower direction to the upper direction. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the above-mentioned countdown fluctuation effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the forward direction variation effect is started after the countdown display. However, after the countdown display, another effect may be executed before the forward direction change effect. For example, the state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed may be displayed. The same applies between the countdown display and the reverse direction change effect. Further, the countdown variation effect may include a part of each effect shown in FIGS. 92 to 94. For example, the countdown variation effect may not include the right decorative design slip stop effect.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the forward variation effect is such that the decorative symbol moves from the upper direction to the lower direction of the display screen 7a. However, the forward direction variation effect may be an effect of a variation mode other than this. For example, the forward direction variation effect may be an effect in which the decorative symbol moves from the left direction to the right direction on the display screen 7a. The same applies to the reverse direction change effect.

[Modification 3]
In the countdown variation effect, the countdown display is executed twice (for example, FIG. 92A and FIG. 92E). However, the number of countdown displays can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the countdown variation effect A, FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (D) may be repeated a plurality of times, and thereafter FIG. 92 (E) to FIG. 92 (H) may be executed. At this time, the numerical image IN1 is sequentially decremented by one.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D10-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a numerical image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative design,
A first effect in which the numerical image is displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the decorative design is variably displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ Aspect D10-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D10-1,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed,
After the third effect, it is possible to execute a fourth effect in which a numerical image decremented by 1 from the numerical image displayed in the first effect is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ Aspect D10-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D10-2,
After the fourth effect, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which a reverse variation display is performed in which the decorative design moves in a direction opposite to the variation display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D10-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect D10-3,
In the third effect, the reach effect by the decorative design is not executed,
After the fifth effect, a reach effect is executed by the decorative design.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ Aspect D10-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect D10-3 or aspect D10-4,
In the fifth effect, the decorative design moves upward from the lower direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The operation unit image superimposing effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation unit image superimposing effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation unit image superimposition effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Operation section image superimposing effect A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image superimposing effect A. FIG. In the operation unit image superimposing effect A, first, the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect of FIG. 95 (A) is executed. Specifically, first, the operation unit image BI1, the first specific image IC1, and the character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation unit image BI1 is an image representing the appearance of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1, and here represents the appearance of the effect button 63. Note that the operation unit image BI <b> 1 may represent the appearance of an operation unit other than the effect button 63 as long as it is an operation unit included in the gaming machine 1. The first specific image IC1 is an image representing a specific target, and here represents the shape of a smile. A specific object means anything that can be recognized as one independent object. In addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures and characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, Etc. are also included. The operation unit image BI1 is displayed so as to cover a part of the lower side of the first specific image IC1. The character image IW1 represents characters related to the operation method of the operation unit image BI1. Here, “Press!” Is displayed as a character related to the operation method of the effect button 63 represented by the operation unit image BI1. In addition, when the operation part image BI1 represents the effect button 63, as a character image related to the operation method, “continuous hit”, “PUSH”, and the like can be exemplified. The character image IW1 is displayed so as to overlap the first specific image IC1.

  Next, the specific image corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 95 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit image BI1. Here, the first specific image IC1 moves (vibrates) in the vertical direction. That is, the effect button 63 represented by the operation unit image BI1 is because the operation direction is the vertical direction. For example, when the first specific image IC1 represents the handle 60, the first specific image IC1 rotates to the left and right.

  Next, the specific image enlarging effect shown in FIG. 95 (C) is executed. Specifically, the second specific image IC2 is displayed instead of the first specific image IC1. The second specific image IC2 is an image representing the same specific object as the first specific image IC1, and is larger in size than the first specific image IC1. That is, in the specific image enlarging effect, the effect of enlarging the image representing the specific target (here, smile) is performed by switching from the first specific image IC1 to the second specific image IC2. Similar to the first specific image IC1, the lower part of the second specific image IC2 is covered with the operation unit image BI1. The character image IW1 is continuously displayed and is displayed so as to overlap the second specific image IC2.

  Next, the specific image corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 95 (D) is executed. Specifically, like the first specific image IC1, the second specific image IC2 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit image BI1. That is, it vibrates in the vertical direction. 95A to 95D, the first specific image IC1 vibrating in the vertical direction is switched to the second specific image IC2 vibrating in the vertical direction.

  Next, the specific image enlarging effect shown in FIG. 95 (E) is executed. Specifically, the third specific image IC3 is displayed instead of the second specific image IC2. The third specific image IC3 is an image representing the same specific object as the second specific image IC2, and is larger in size than the second specific image IC2. That is, the first specific image IC1 is switched to the second specific image IC2 and the second specific image IC1 is switched to the third specific image IC2 by the specific image enlarging effect in FIGS. 95 (C) and 95 (E). Thus, an effect is produced in which an image representing a specific target (here, a smile) gradually becomes larger. Similar to the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2, the lower part of the third specific image IC3 is covered with the operation unit image BI1. The character image IW1 is continuously displayed, and is displayed so as to overlap the third specific image IC3.

  Next, the specific image corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 95 (F) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2, the third specific image IC3 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit image BI1. That is, it vibrates in the vertical direction. 95A to 95F, the first specific image IC1 vibrating in the vertical direction is switched to the second specific image IC2 vibrating in the vertical direction, and further in the vertical direction. An effect of switching to the vibrating third specific image IC3 is performed.

[Operation part image superimposition effect B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image superimposing effect B. The operation unit image superimposing effect B is different from the operation unit image superimposing effect A of FIG. In the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect in FIG. 96A, the first operation unit image BI1, the first specific image IC1, and the first character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The points other than the character content of the first character image IW1 are the same as the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect of FIG.

  Next, the enlarging / corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 96 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the first operation unit image BI1 while gradually increasing in size. Here, the first specific image IC1 moves (vibrates) in the vertical direction. That is, the effect button 63 represented by the first operation unit image BI1 is because the operation direction is the vertical direction. Further, the enlarging / corresponding movement effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the first operation unit image BI1 while further increasing in size.

  Next, the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect shown in FIG. 96 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second operation unit image AS1, the fourth specific image IC4, and the second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second operation section image AS1 is an image showing the appearance of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1, and here shows the appearance of the sword member 64 including the sword button 65. The fourth specific image IC4 is an image representing a specific target, and here represents a smile shape different from that of the first specific image IC1. The second operation unit image AS1 is displayed so as to cover a part of the fourth specific image IC4. In the second character image IW2, characters related to the operation method of the second operation unit image AS1 are represented. Here, “Push!” Is displayed as a character related to the operation method of the sword member 64 represented by the second operation section image AS1. The second character image IW2 is displayed so as to overlap the fourth specific image IC4.

  Next, the enlarging / corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 96 (E) is executed. Specifically, the fourth specific image IC4 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the second operation unit image AS1 while gradually increasing in size. Here, the fourth specific image IC4 moves in the vertical direction. That is, the operation direction of the sword member 64 represented by the second operation unit image AS1 is the vertical direction. Further, the enlarging / corresponding movement effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the fourth specific image IC4 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the second operation unit image AS1 while further increasing in size.

[Operation unit image superimposing effect C]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image superimposing effect C. In the operation unit image superimposing effect C, first, the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect of FIG. 97 (A) is executed. Specifically, the operation unit image BI1, the specific image IC1, and the first character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The points other than the specific image IC1 not moving up and down are the same as the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect of FIG.

  Next, the specific image viewing difficulty effect shown in FIG. 97 (B) is executed. Specifically, when the player operates the effect button 63, the specific image IC1 explodes and disappears, and the specific image IC1 becomes difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the operation unit image BI1 and the second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second character image IW2 is a character that suggests that an operation by the player has been detected, and is displayed as “Yay-a” here. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the operation unit image viewing difficulty rendering is executed. Specifically, the operation unit image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image IC1 and the second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Next, the specific image change effect shown in FIG. 97 (D) is executed. Specifically, the aspect of the specific image IC1 changes. The change in the form is, for example, a change in color or shape. Here, the color of the specific image IC1 changes from the first color to the second color. The color change of the specific image IC1 may be an aspect in which the first color and the second color are alternately repeated.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of an operation part image superimposition effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the state where the first specific image IC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the operation unit image is covered so as to cover at least a part of the first specific image IC1. A first effect in which BI1 is displayed and a second effect in which a second specific image IC2 larger than the first specific image IC1 is displayed after the first effect can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, after the second effect, the third effect in which the third specific image IC3 larger than the second specific image IC2 is displayed can be executed. It is. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the second effect, at least a part of the second specific image IC2 is covered with the operation unit image BI1. . According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the third effect, at least a part of the third specific image IC3 is covered with the operation unit image BI1. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the first effect, the first specific image IC1 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit image BI1. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the first effect, an image related to the operation method of the operation unit image BI1 is displayed on at least a part of the first specific image IC1. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an operation part image superimposition effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the operation unit image superimposing effect A in FIG. 95, the operation unit image BI1 covers at least a part of the first specific image IC1. However, the operation unit image BI1 may cover the entire first specific image IC1. The operation unit image BI1 covers a part of each of the second specific image IC2 and the third specific image IC3. However, the operation unit image BI1 may not cover at least one of the second specific image IC2 and the third specific image IC3.

[Modification 2]
The operation unit image superimposing effects A to C shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 are a part of examples, and may not include a part of the series of effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 97. In addition, other effects may be included between the series of effects shown in FIGS. For example, in the operation unit image superimposing effect A in FIG. 95, the specific image enlarging effect is performed twice, but it may be performed once or may be performed three times or more.

[Modification 3]
The operation unit image superimposing effects A to C shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 are only a part of examples, and even if a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of FIGS. 95 to 97 is not displayed. Alternatively, other images may be further displayed. For example, in the operation unit image superimposing effect A in FIG. 95, the character image IW1 may not be displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation unit image representing an appearance of the operation unit,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target,
A first effect in which the operation means image is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the first specific image in a state where the first specific image is displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the second specific image larger than the first specific image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the third specific image larger than the second specific image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2,
In the second effect, at least a part of the second specific image is covered with the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
In the third effect, at least a part of the third specific image is covered with the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4,
In the first effect, the first specific image moves in a direction corresponding to an operation direction of the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5,
In the first effect, an image related to the operation method of the operation means is displayed on at least a part of the first specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The character appearance effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. This character appearance effect can be executed, for example, at the start of variable symbol special display.

[Character appearance effect A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect A. FIG.
First, in the character appearance effect A, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are effects in which the variation starts. In addition, this change start effect indicates that the effect mode is mode A as shown in the lower left of FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the first character appearance effect is executed. This first character appearance effect is an effect that the smiling character E21 appears so as to fill the edge of the display screen 7a in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

  In the first character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 appears so as to fill in the edge portion of the display screen 7a, but may appear in a part of the edge portion of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the second character appearance effect is executed. This second character appearance effect is an effect in which the smiling character E21 further proliferates around the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R from the state of the first character appearance effect.

  In this case, in the second character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 grows (moves) toward the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. That is, the smiling character E21 is growing (moving) toward a predetermined spot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), a mode change effect is executed. This mode change effect is an effect of changing the effect mode from mode A to mode B, and is an effect in which the mode B image E22 is displayed. The mode B image E22 is an image suggesting that the mode B is set.
98 (A) to 98 (D) are the same variation effects.

[Character appearance effect B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect B. FIG.
First, in the character appearance effect B, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are effects in which the variation starts. This variation start effect indicates that the effect mode is mode A, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 99 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), the first character appearance effect is executed. This first character appearance effect is an effect that the smiling character E21 appears so as to fill the edge of the display screen 7a in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

  In the first character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 appears so as to fill in the edge portion of the display screen 7a, but may appear in a part of the edge portion of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99C, the second character appearance effect is executed. In this second character appearance effect, the smiley character E21 is further propagated from the state of the first character appearance effect to the vicinity of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. 8L, 8C and 8R are invisible.

  In this case, in the second character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 grows (moves) toward the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. That is, the smiling character E21 is growing (moving) toward a predetermined spot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), a mode change effect is executed. This mode change effect is an effect of changing the effect mode from mode A to mode B, and is an effect in which the mode B image E22 is displayed. The mode B image E22 is an image suggesting that the mode B is set.
99 (A) to 99 (D) are the same variation effects.

[Character appearance effect C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect C. FIG.
First, in the character appearance effect C, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are effects in which the variation starts. Further, this variation start effect indicates that the effect mode is mode A, as shown in the lower left of FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the first character appearance effect is executed. This first character appearance effect is an effect that the smiling character E21 appears so as to fill the edge of the display screen 7a in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R include a smiling symbol E23 together with a numeric symbol. The smiling design E23 is the same image as the smiling character E21. It should be noted that the smiley design E23 may have a part of the smiley character E21. Further, a part of the smiling symbol E23 and a part of the smiling character E21 may be the same.

  In the first character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 appears so as to fill in the edge portion of the display screen 7a, but may appear in a part of the edge portion of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the second character appearance effect is executed. In this second character appearance effect, the smiley character E21 is further propagated from the state of the first character appearance effect to the vicinity of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. 8L, 8C and 8R are invisible.

  In this case, in the second character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 grows (moves) toward the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. That is, the smiling character E21 is growing (moving) toward a predetermined spot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), a mode change effect is executed. This mode change effect is an effect of changing the effect mode from mode A to mode B, and is an effect in which the mode B image E22 is displayed. The mode B image E22 is an image suggesting that the mode B is set.
100A to 100D show the same fluctuation effects.

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of effects for character appearance effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effect, the first character appearance effect in which the smiling character E21 appears is performed, and then the second character appearance in which more smile characters E21 appear than the first character appearance effect. An effect is performed, and then a mode change effect is performed. According to this configuration, the expectation of transition to the mode change effect is increased due to the increase in the number of smiling characters E21, and there is a case where the transition to the mode change effect is performed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the second character appearance effect of the character appearance effect includes an effect that the smiling character E21 moves toward the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. According to this configuration, since the smiling character E21 moves toward the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effects B and C, the smiling character E21 covers the display screen 7a with the second character appearance effect. According to this structure, an impact can be given to a player and the interest of a game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effect C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R having the same smile symbol E23 as the smiley character E21 are varied in the first character appearance effect. According to this configuration, the smiling character can be emphasized using the smiling character E21 and the smiling symbol E23, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effect, the mode change effect is executed after the second character appearance effect. According to this configuration, the expectation of mode change is improved by increasing the number of smiling characters E21, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a character appearance effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effects A to C, the smiling character E21 appears in the state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. It is not limited. For example, a configuration in which the smiling character E21 appears in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed may be employed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the mode change effect is executed after the second character appearance effect in the character appearance effects A to C, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the second character appearance effect, effects such as a chance-up effect, a prefetch effect, a jackpot suggestion effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a jackpot notification effect, a reach notice effect, and the like may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effects A to C, it is possible to perform an accessory movable effect that moves the second movable accessory 15 that is the same character as the smiling character E21.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect in which a first character effect in which a predetermined character appears is performed,
The second display effect is an effect in which a second character effect in which more of the predetermined character appears than the first character effect is performed,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a predetermined effect,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The second display effect includes an effect in which the predetermined character moves toward a predetermined position of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined character covers the predetermined area of the display means,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of changing the decorative design,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed when the fifth display effect is performed,
A part of the decorative design and a part of the predetermined character have the same shape,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The predetermined effect is a mode change effect for changing the mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the reserved continuous suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. This reserved continuous suggestion effect can be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display.

[Reserved continuous suggestion effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the reserved continuous suggestion effect A. FIG.
First, in the reserved continuous suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the first specific hold effect is executed. This first specific hold effect is an effect that uses the first specific hold as an object to determine whether the object hold is a big hit or not, and a button image E31 is shown. The button image E31 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. For example, the first specific hold effect is based on whether the first hold is a big hit or a big hit, with the first hold as the first specific hold. In addition, the first specific hold effect, for example, uses the first hold and the second hold as the first specific hold, and divides whether the first hold or the second hold is a big hit or a big hit.

  For example, when there are four holds, the oldest hold becomes the first hold, the next old hold becomes the second hold, the next oldest hold becomes the third hold, and the newest hold becomes the fourth hold. . The same applies to the following.

  If the first specific hold has a big hit, after the first specific hold effect, the process proceeds to the hold continuous success effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, when there is no big hit in the first specific hold, the process shifts to the hold continuous failure effect shown in FIG. 101 (C) after the first specific hold effect.

  After the first specific hold effect, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the hold continuous success effect can be executed. When the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the hold continuous success effect displays an optical image E33 that suggests that the first specific hold has a big hit at the place where the button image E31 was present, A character image E32 suggesting that the first specific hold has a big hit is displayed below the optical image E33. The light image E33 is an image representing a state of shining, and the character image E32 is an image representing a character of “success”.

  After the first specific hold effect, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), the hold continuous failure effect can be executed. Even if the effect button 63 is pressed down by the player, the hold consecutive failure effect does not display the light image E33 at the place where the button image E31 was present, and suggests that there is no big hit in the first specific hold. E34 is displayed. The character image E34 is an image representing the character “failure”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the second specific hold effect is executed. This second specific hold effect is an effect that uses a second specific hold different from the first specific hold as an object and determines whether the target hold is a big hit or a big hit, and a button image E31 is shown. This second specific hold effect, for example, tells whether the third hold is a big hit or not a big win, with the third hold as the second specific hold. In addition, the second specific hold effect, for example, uses the third hold and the fourth hold as the second specific hold, and divides whether the third hold or the fourth hold is a big hit or a big hit.

  If the second specific hold has a big hit, after the second specific hold effect, the process proceeds to the hold continuous success effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the second specific hold is not a big hit, after the second specific hold effect, the process proceeds to the hold continuous failure effect shown in FIG.

  After the second specific hold effect, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the hold continuous success effect can be executed. When the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the hold continuous success effect displays an optical image E33 that suggests that the first specific hold has a big hit at the place where the button image E31 was present, A character image E32 suggesting that the first specific hold has a big hit is displayed below the optical image E33.

After the second specific hold effect, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), the hold continuous failure effect can be executed. Even if the effect button 63 is pressed down by the player, the hold consecutive failure effect does not display the light image E33 at the place where the button image E31 was present, and suggests that there is no big hit in the first specific hold. E34 is displayed.
Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 101A to 101F are the same fluctuation effects.

[Reserved continuous suggestion effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the reserved continuous suggestion effect B. FIG. This reserved continuous suggestion effect B is an effect when there are at least four reservations.
First, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the first hold effect is executed in the hold continuous suggestion effect B. The first hold effect is an effect that tells whether the target hold is a jackpot or not a jackpot for the first hold, and a button image E31 is shown. The button image E31 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63.

  When there is a big hit in the first hold, after the first hold effect, the process shifts to the hold continuous success effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, when there is no big hit in the first hold, after the first specific hold effect, the process shifts to the hold continuous failure effect shown in FIG.

  After the first hold effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the hold continuous success effect can be executed. When the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the hold continuous success effect displays an optical image E33 that suggests that the first hold has a big hit at the place where the button image E31 is present, A character image E32 is displayed below the image E33, which suggests that the first reservation has a big hit. The light image E33 is an image representing a state of shining, and the character image E32 is an image representing a character of “success”.

  After the first hold effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the hold continuous failure effect may be executed. Even if the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the hold consecutive failure effect does not display the light image E33 at the place where the button image E31 was present, and the character image E34 suggesting that the first hold is not a big hit. Is displayed. The character image E34 is an image representing the character “failure”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the second hold effect is executed. This second hold effect is an effect that tells whether the target hold is a jackpot or not a jackpot for the second hold, and shows a button image E31.

  When there is a big hit in the second hold, after the second hold effect, the process shifts to the hold continuous success effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, when there is no big hit in the 2nd hold, after the 2nd hold production, it shifts to the hold continuous failure production shown in FIG.

  After the second hold effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), the hold continuous success effect can be executed. When the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the hold continuous success effect displays an optical image E33 that suggests that the second hold has a big hit at the place where the button image E31 is present, A character image E32 that suggests that the second reservation has a big hit is displayed below the image E33.

  After the second hold effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), the hold continuous failure effect can be executed. Even if the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the hold consecutive failure effect does not display the light image E33 at the place where the button image E31 was present, and the character image E34 suggesting that the second hold is not a big hit. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the third hold effect is executed. This third hold effect is an effect that tells whether the target hold is a jackpot or not a jackpot for the third hold, and shows a button image E31.

  When there is a big hit in the third hold, after the third hold effect, the process shifts to the hold continuous success effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, if there is no big hit in the third hold, after the third hold effect, the process shifts to the hold continuous failure effect shown in FIG.

  After the third hold effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (H), the hold continuous success effect can be executed. When the player presses the effect button 63, the hold continuous success effect displays an optical image E33 that suggests that the third hold is a big hit at the place where the button image E31 is present, A character image E32 is displayed below the image E33, which suggests that the third hold has a big hit.

  After the third hold effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (I), the hold continuous failure effect may be executed. Even if the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the hold consecutive failure effect does not display the light image E33 at the place where the button image E31 was present, and the character image E34 suggesting that the third hold is not a big hit. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (J), the fourth hold effect is executed. This fourth hold effect is an effect that tells whether the target hold is a jackpot or not a jackpot for the fourth hold, and shows a button image E31.

  When the fourth hold has a big hit, after the fourth hold effect, the process shifts to the hold continuous success effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, when there is no big hit in the 4th hold, after the 4th hold production, it shifts to the hold continuous failure production shown in FIG.

  After the fourth hold effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (K), the hold continuous success effect can be executed. When the player presses the effect button 63, the hold continuous success effect displays an optical image E33 that suggests that the fourth hold is a big hit at the place where the button image E31 was present, A character image E32 is displayed below the image E33, which suggests that the fourth reservation has a big hit.

After the fourth hold effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (L), the hold continuous failure effect may be executed. Even if the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the hold consecutive failure effect does not display the light image E33 at the place where the button image E31 was present, and the character image E34 suggesting that the fourth hold is not a big hit. Is displayed.
Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 102A to 102L are the same fluctuation effects.

[Reserved continuous suggestion effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the reserved continuous suggestion effect C.
First, in the hold continuous suggestion effect C, the hold effect is executed as shown in FIG. This on-hold effect is an effect that tells whether the on-hold is a big hit or a big hit, and a button image E31 is shown. The button image E31 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63.

  If the hold is a big hit, after the hold effect, the process proceeds to the hold continuous success effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the hold is not a big hit, after the hold effect, the process shifts to a hold continuous failure effect shown in FIG.

  After the hold effect, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the hold continuous success effect can be executed. If the player presses the effect button 63, the hold consecutive success effect suggests that the hold is a big hit at the place where the button image E31 exists (indicating that the change is a big hit). A light image E33 is displayed, and a character image E32 indicating that the hold is a big hit (indicating that the change is a big hit) is displayed below the light image E33. The light image E33 is an image representing a state of shining, and the character image E32 is an image representing a character of “success”.

  After the hold effect, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the hold continuous failure effect can be executed. Even if the effect button 63 is pressed down by the player, the hold consecutive failure effect does not display the light image E33 at the place where the button image E31 was present, and suggests that there is no big hit in the first specific hold. E34 is displayed. The character image E34 is an image representing the character “failure”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the first specific hold effect is executed. This first specific hold effect is an effect that fortunes whether the target hold is a big hit or not a big win for the first specific hold, and a button image E31 is shown. For example, the first specific hold effect is based on whether the first hold is a big hit or a big hit, with the first hold as the first specific hold. Moreover, this 1st specific holding | maintenance effect divides whether the 1st holding or the 2nd holding is a big hit or a big hit, for example by making the 1st holding and the 2nd holding into the 1st specific holding.

  When the first specific hold has a big hit, after the first specific hold effect, the process proceeds to the hold continuous success effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the first specific hold is not a big hit, after the first specific hold effect, the process shifts to the hold continuous failure effect shown in FIG.

  After the first specific hold effect, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), the hold continuous success effect can be executed. When the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the hold continuous success effect displays an optical image E33 that suggests that the first specific hold has a big hit at the place where the button image E31 was present, A character image E32 suggesting that the first specific hold has a big hit is displayed below the optical image E33.

  After the first specific hold effect, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), the hold continuous failure effect may be executed. Even if the effect button 63 is pressed down by the player, the hold consecutive failure effect does not display the light image E33 at the place where the button image E31 was present, and suggests that there is no big hit in the first specific hold. E34 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), the second specific hold effect is executed. This second specific hold effect is an effect that uses a second specific hold different from the first specific hold as an object and determines whether the target hold is a big hit or a big hit, and a button image E31 is shown. This second specific hold effect, for example, tells whether the third hold is a big hit or not a big win, with the third hold as the second specific hold. In addition, the second specific hold effect, for example, uses the third hold and the fourth hold as the second specific hold, and divides whether the third hold or the fourth hold is a big hit or a big hit.

  When the second specific hold has a big hit, after the second specific hold effect, the process proceeds to the hold continuous success effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the second specific hold is not a big hit, after the second specific hold effect, the process proceeds to the hold continuous failure effect shown in FIG.

  After the second specific hold effect, as shown in FIG. 103 (H), the hold continuous success effect can be executed. When the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the hold continuous success effect displays an optical image E33 that suggests that the first specific hold has a big hit at the place where the button image E31 was present, A character image E32 suggesting that the first specific hold has a big hit is displayed below the optical image E33.

After the second specific hold effect, as shown in FIG. 103 (I), the hold continuous failure effect can be executed. Even if the effect button 63 is pressed down by the player, the hold consecutive failure effect does not display the light image E33 at the place where the button image E31 was present, and suggests that there is no big hit in the first specific hold. E34 is displayed.
Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 103A to 103I are the same fluctuation effects.

[Example of effects]
The following shows an example of the effect of the reserved continuous suggestion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the second specific holding effect, the holding sequence success or the holding sequence failure is executed after the first specific holding effect, the holding sequence success or the holding sequence failure in the holding sequence suggestion effects A and C. The Further, in the hold sequence suggestion effect B, the second hold effect, the hold sequence success or the hold sequence failure is executed after the first hold production, the hold sequence success or the hold sequence failure. According to this configuration, since it is possible to suggest two or more reserved runs, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved continuous suggestion effect is executed in the same variation. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify a plurality of reserved runs with a single change, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in addition to a plurality of pending run suggestion effects, in the case of a big win in the change, an effect that suggests that the change is a big win is executed in the hold continuous suggestion effect C. ing. According to this configuration, in addition to the notification of a plurality of pending trains, notification of the jackpot of the change can be performed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the reserved continuous suggestion effect is performed with a variation within a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game. According to this configuration, when the afterglow after the big hit is strong, it is possible to suggest the reservation ream and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the reserved continuous suggestion effect is performed during the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the jackpot game can be made more interesting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a reservation continuous suggestion effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved continuous suggestion effects A to C are effects of the same variation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the reserved continuous suggestion effect is performed with future variations. You may do it. For example, in the reserved continuous suggestion effect A, FIGS. 101 (A) to (C) may be performed with the variation, and FIGS. 101 (D) to (F) may be performed with the next variation.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the reserved continuous suggestion effects A to C may be performed with fluctuation within a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game. Moreover, you may be made to perform holding continuous suggestion effects AC during a jackpot game.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved continuous suggestion effect B is an example of the effect when there are four holds, but when there are three holds, the processes shown in FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (I) are performed. If there are two holds, the processes shown in FIGS. 103A to 103F may be performed. If there is one hold, the processes shown in FIGS. 103A to 103C may be performed. ) May be performed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect that performs a first hold continuous suggestion effect that suggests whether or not there is a big hit in the first hold,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second hold continuous suggestion effect that suggests whether there is a big hit in the second hold different from the first hold,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E3-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The combination effect is performed in the same variation,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of performing the variation jackpot suggesting effect that suggests that the variation is a jackpot in the case of a jackpot in the variation,
The combination effect includes the fifth display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The first hold suggesting effect or the second hold suggesting effect is performed with a variation within a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The first hold suggesting effect or the second hold suggesting effect is performed during a jackpot game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The area display effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. This area display effect may be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display.

[Area display effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the area display effect A. FIG.
First, in the area display effect A, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary, and the hold display area C41 is displayed. In the hold display area C41, a hold image 9A and a hold digest image 9C are shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the first area display effect is executed. In this first area display effect, the first area E41 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), the second area display effect is executed. In this second area display effect, the second area E42 is displayed around the right side of the display screen 7a. In the second area display effect, the state of the first area E41 is the same as that in the first area display effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), the second region movement effect is executed. In the second area movement effect, the second area E42 is an effect of moving upward. Specifically, the second area E42 moves based on the hold display area C41. The second region E42 is not limited to this, and other reference positions (for example, the second reserved icon 9C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the corners of the display screen 7a, and the reference points that appear on the display screen 7a). You may move to the reference. In the second area display effect, the state of the first area E41 is the same as that in the first area display effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance up effect, the chance up display is performed in the second area E42. This chance-up display is expressed as “super hot”, suggesting that the expectation of jackpot is high.

[Area display effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the area display effect B. In FIG.
First, in the area display effect B, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary, and the hold display area C41 is displayed. In the hold display area C41, a hold image 9A and a hold digest image 9C are shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the first area display effect is executed. In this first area display effect, the first area E41 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the second area display effect is executed. In this second area display effect, the second area E42 is displayed around the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, in the second area display effect, the first area E41 is reduced more than in the first area display effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), the second region movement effect is executed. In the second region movement effect, the second region E42 is an effect of moving upward while expanding. Specifically, the second area E42 moves based on the hold display area C41. The second region E42 is not limited to this, and other reference positions (for example, the second reserved icon 9C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the corners of the display screen 7a, and the reference points that appear on the display screen 7a). You may move to the reference. In this second area display effect, the state of the first area E41 is reduced more than during the second area display effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance up effect, the chance up display is performed in the second area E42. This chance-up display is expressed as “super hot”, suggesting that the expectation of jackpot is high. In this chance-up effect, the first area E41 is destroyed.

[Area display effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the area display effect C. In FIG.
First, in the area display effect C, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary, and the hold display area C41 is displayed. In the hold display area C41, a hold image 9A and a hold digest image 9C are shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the first area display effect is executed. In this first area display effect, the first area E41 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106C, the second region display effect is executed. In this second area display effect, the second area E42 is displayed around the right side of the display screen 7a. In the second area display effect, the first area E41 rotates counterclockwise around the holding display area C41 as a rotation axis, and a part of the first area E41 disappears from the display screen 7a. Is reduced.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), the second region movement effect is executed. In the second area movement effect, the second area E42 rotates counterclockwise with the holding display area C41 as the rotation axis, and the area of the second area E42 is enlarged. In the second area display effect, the first area E41 rotates counterclockwise around the holding display area C41 as a rotation axis, and a part of the first area E41 disappears from the display screen 7a, so that the second area display effect is further increased than in the second area display effect. Reduced.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance up effect, the chance up display is performed in the second area E42. This chance-up display is expressed as “super hot”, suggesting that the expectation of jackpot is high. In this chance-up effect, the first area E41 is destroyed.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of an area | region display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effect, the first area display effect is performed, then the second area display effect is performed, then the second area movement effect is performed, and then the chance up effect is performed. It has become. According to this configuration, a predetermined sense of expectation can be given by a change in the area, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effects B and C, after the second area display effect for displaying the second area E42, the second area movement effect for expanding the second area E42 is executed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the second area E42 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effects B and C, after the second area display effect for displaying the second area E42, the second area movement effect for reducing the first area E41 is executed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the second area E42 and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effects B and C, after the second area display effect for displaying the second area E42, the second area movement effect for reducing the first area E41 is executed. A chance-up effect for eliminating one area E41 is executed. According to this structure, the 2nd area | region E42 can be emphasized, ie, the production using the 2nd area | region E42 can be emphasized more. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the area display effect C, when the second area E42 is moved, the second area E42 is rotated and moved with the reserved display area C41 as the rotation axis. According to this configuration, the movement of the second region E42 can be performed dynamically, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an area | region display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effects A to C, after the second area movement effect, the chance increase effect is performed using the second area E42, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, after the second area movement effect, various effects such as a mode suggestion effect, a prefetching effect, a jackpot suggestion effect, a reach notice effect, and a hold change suggestion effect may be performed using the second region E42.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing an effect of displaying the first region on the display screen of the display means,
The second display effect is an effect of performing an effect of displaying the second area on the display screen of the display means,
The third display effect is an effect of performing an effect of moving the second area with respect to a certain reference,
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing a predetermined effect in the second area,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, after which the third display effect is performed, and then, the fourth display effect is performed. It is carried out,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E4-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of performing an effect of enlarging the second area,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect of performing an effect of reducing the first area,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E4-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect 3,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a seventh display effect may be performed.
The seventh display effect is an effect that performs an effect of annihilating the first region,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the seventh display effect,
In the combination effect, the seventh display effect is performed after the sixth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The third display effect is an effect of performing an effect of rotating and moving the second region with respect to a certain reference axis.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The short time mode effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. The short-time mode effect can be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display.

[Time reduction mode production A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the short-time mode effect A. At this time, the short mode effect A represents an effect at the time of deviation of two fluctuations. When the gaming state is a short-time state, such an effect at the time of losing is continuously performed.

  First, in the short time mode effect A, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the variation effect is executed. This variation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the off symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This off symbol arrangement stop effect is an effect of stopping the off symbol array that represents a deviation using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 107 (B), 7 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8L, and 6 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8C and the decorative symbol 8R as the off-line symbol arrangement.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), the off symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This off symbol arrangement stop effect is an effect of stopping the off symbol array that represents a deviation using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 107 (D), 7 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8L, and 6 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8C and the decorative symbol 8R as the off-line symbol arrangement.

  As described above, in the short-time mode effect A, the shift notification is performed in a relatively short time without interposing a time-consuming effect such as a reach effect after the change is started.

[Time reduction mode production B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the time reduction mode effect B. FIG. The short-time mode effect B is an effect that is performed when the gaming state is the short-time state, and represents an effect of fluctuation that is a big hit after the effect at the time of a deviation of one change.

  First, in the short time mode effect B, the variation effect is executed as shown in FIG. This variation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), the off symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This off symbol arrangement stop effect is an effect of stopping the off symbol array that represents a deviation using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 108 (B), 7 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8L, and 6 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8C and the decorative symbol 8R, as the off symbol array.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot symbol array stop effect is an effect of stopping the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 108 (D), 7 symbols are formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the jackpot symbol arrangement.

  As described above, in the short-time mode effect B, even if it is a change in the case of a big win, after the change is started, a big hit notification is performed in a relatively short time without interposing a time-consuming effect such as a reach effect.

[Normal mode production]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the normal mode effect. This normal mode effect is an effect that is performed when the gaming state is in the normal state, and represents an effect at the time of deviation of one change.

  First, in the normal mode effect, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), the variation effect is executed. This variation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), a reach effect is executed. In this Lee effect, a reach state is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the teammate character CRA develops various effects.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), the off symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This off symbol arrangement stop effect is an effect of stopping the off symbol array that represents a deviation using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 109 (C), 7 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8L, and 6 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8C and the decorative symbol 8R.

  In the case where the gaming state is the normal state, when a big hit is made, the big hit notification is made via the reach effect. Further, in the case where the gaming state is the normal state, in the case of losing, a relatively short effect as shown in FIGS. 107 (A) and 107 (B) and FIGS.

When the gaming state is the short time state (short time), the shift variation effect of the short time mode effect A in FIGS. 107 (A) and 107 (B) and 107 (C) and (D) is continuously performed until the big hit. In other words, in the case of a deviation in the time-short state (displacement fluctuation), an effect using time, for example, a reach effect or the like is not executed, so the variation time is relatively short. On the other hand, in the deviation variation when the game state is the normal state, as shown in the normal mode effect in FIG. 109, a relatively long effect such as a reach effect may be performed, and the variation time is relatively long.
Also, in the case of a big hit in the short-running state (big hit change), the time-consuming effect, such as the reach effect, is not executed, so the change time is relatively short. On the other hand, in the big hit fluctuation when the game state is the normal state, a relatively long effect such as a reach effect may be performed, and the change time is relatively long.

In other words, the average fluctuation time is relatively short in the short-time state deviation fluctuation. On the other hand, the average fluctuation time is relatively long in the normal state deviation fluctuation.
Moreover, the average fluctuation time is relatively short in the jackpot fluctuation in the short-time state. On the other hand, in the big hit fluctuation in the normal state, the average fluctuation time is relatively long.

[Example of effects]
Below, the effect example of a time-short mode effect and a normal mode effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the short-time mode effect, in the case of a loss, after the decoration symbol starts to change, the effect that the decoration symbol is removed and stopped and displayed in the symbol arrangement without going through the reach state is performed. In the mode effect, in the case of a deviation, after the decoration symbol starts to change, an effect is performed in which the decoration symbol is removed and stopped and displayed in the symbol arrangement via the reach state. According to this configuration, in the time reduction mode effect, high-speed digestion is possible, and the next jackpot can be quickly acquired. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the time reduction mode effect continues the deviation variation effect of FIGS. 107 (A), (B) and FIGS. 107 (C), (D) until the predetermined number of times of change after the big hit. (Refer to Modification 1 described later). According to this configuration, high-speed digestion is possible up to a predetermined number of fluctuations after the big hit, and the next big hit can be quickly acquired. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the time reduction mode effect is continuously performed as the shift variation effect of FIGS. 107 (A) and 107 (B) and FIGS. 107 (C) and (D) of the time reduction mode effect A until the big hit. . According to this configuration, high-speed digestion is possible until a big hit, and the next big hit can be quickly acquired. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the normal mode effect is the effect that the decorative symbol is removed via the reach state after the decoration symbol starts, and the reach state is displayed after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed in the arrangement of the decorative symbols. One effect is performed among a plurality of effects including an effect in which the decorative symbols are removed and stopped and displayed in the symbol arrangement without going through. According to this configuration, in the normal mode effect, it is possible to provide an effect in which a certain player can enjoy it, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the variation time (average variation time) of the short-time mode effect is shorter than the variation time (average variation time) of the normal mode effect. According to this configuration, in the time reduction mode effect, high-speed digestion is possible, and the next jackpot can be quickly acquired. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a time-short mode effect and a normal mode effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the gaming state is the short-time state (short time), the time-short mode effect A in FIGS. 107 (A), 107 (B), 107 (C), 107 (D) until the big hit. Although the deviation variation effect is continuously performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the gaming state is a short-time state (short-time), unless the big hit is made, up to a predetermined number of fluctuations after the big hit, the deviation fluctuation of FIG. 107 (A), (B) or 107 (C), (D) You may make it perform continuously.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect that performs a first mode effect that enters after the first jackpot,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second mode effect that rushes after a second jackpot different from the first jackpot,
In the first mode effect, after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, a loss variation effect is performed in which the final symbol is stopped without going through the reach state.
In the second mode effect, after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, a reach variation effect is performed in which the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped via the reach state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E5-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the first mode effect, the loss change effect is continued until a predetermined number of changes after the first jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
In the first mode effect, the loss variation effect is continued until the next jackpot after the first jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
In the second mode effect, one effect among a plurality of change effects including the reach change effect and the loss change effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
In the first mode effect, the change time in the big hit change is shorter than the change time of the reach change effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the following, the no-reserved-continuation effect, the reserved-representation effect, and the resurrection effect will be described with reference to FIGS. These effects are executed, for example, for fluctuations after a predetermined number of revolutions after the jackpot game during the short working hours, the last fluctuation in the short running state, the first fluctuation after the big hit game, or the last fluctuation in the probability variation state. obtain.

[On-hold continuous production]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining a reserved continuous absence effect.
First, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), the change start effect is executed in the reserved continuous absence effect. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

  Next, a suggestion effect that suggests whether there is a holding jackpot is performed (see FIG. 101A and the like). Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), a reserved continuous absence suggestion effect is executed. In this reserved continuous absence suggestion effect, a button image E61 and a character image E62A are displayed. The button image E61 is an image that does not include an optical image E64, which will be described later, and is an image that suggests that there is no big hit in the hold. Also, the character image E62A is an image suggesting that there is no big hit in the hold, and is an image representing the character “failure”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), a result effect is executed. In this result effect, a result image E63 is displayed. This result image E63 is an image that suggests that the time-short state is ended, and represents the number of RUSH times (number of consecutive chants) or the earned appearances during RUSH (during time shortening, during mid-term chants).
When this uninterrupted rendition effect ends, the short time state (RUSH) ends.
110A, 110B, and 110C are the same variation effects.

[Direction with hold ream]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining a reserved continuous presence effect.
First, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), the variation start effect is executed in the reserved continuous presence effect. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

    Next, a suggestion effect that suggests whether there is a holding jackpot is performed (see FIG. 101A and the like). Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), a reserved continuous presence suggestion effect is executed. In the reserved continuous presence suggestion effect, a button image E61, a character image E62B, and an optical image E64 are displayed. The optical image E64 is an image representing a shining state and is an image that suggests that there is a big hit in the hold. Also, the character image E62B is an image that suggests that there is no big hit in the hold, and is an image representing a character of “success”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot symbol array stop effect is an effect of stopping the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 111 (C), 7 symbols are formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the jackpot symbol arrangement.

111 (A) and (B) show the effect of the change, while FIG. 111 (C) shows the subsequent change and the effect of the change that is a big hit in the hold.
When this rendition effect is completed, the game is a big hit game, and then the short time state (RUSH) continues.

[Restoration production]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the revival effect.
First, in the revival effect, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. This variation start effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

  Next, a suggestion effect that suggests whether there is a holding jackpot is performed (see FIG. 101A and the like). Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), a reserved continuous absence suggestion effect is executed. In this reserved continuous absence suggestion effect, a button image E61 and a character image E62A are displayed. The button image E61 is an image that does not include an optical image E64, which will be described later, and is an image that suggests that there is no big hit in the hold. Also, the character image E62A is an image suggesting that there is no big hit in the hold, and is an image representing the character “failure”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), a result effect is executed. In this result effect, a result image E63 is displayed. This result image E63 is an image that suggests that the time-short state is ended, and represents the number of RUSH times (number of consecutive chants) or the earned appearances during RUSH (during time shortening, during mid-term chants).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), an accessory movable effect is executed. This accessory movable effect is an effect that displays that suggests that there is a big hit in the hold, and that the second movable accessory 15 moves to become the second mode (see FIG. 48). As a display that suggests that there is a jackpot in the hold, the special symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol 8C in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and further, the reserved jackpot suggestion image E65 is displayed. This on-holding jackpot suggestion image E65 is described as “coming from now on”. In this accessory movable effect, a lamp effect is performed using the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66. By these effects, it can be suggested that there is a big hit in the hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot symbol array stop effect is an effect of stopping the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 112 (E), 7 symbols are formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the jackpot symbol arrangement.
When this revival effect ends, it becomes a jackpot game, and then the short time state (RUSH) continues.

112 (A) to 112 (D) show the effect of the change, but FIG. 112 (E) shows the subsequent change and the effect of the change that is a big hit in the hold.
When this rendition effect is completed, the game is a big hit game, and then the short time state (RUSH) continues.

[Example of effects]
In the following, examples of effects of a reserved continuous absence effect, a reserved continuous presence effect, and a resurrection effect are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the revival effect, a suggestion effect that suggests whether there is a holding jackpot is performed, then a result effect is executed, and then a display that suggests that there is a jackpot in holding (an accessory) A movable effect) is executed. According to this structure, although a player is discouraged by a result production | presentation, after that, an accessory movable production | generation is performed and it can acquire big joy. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the revival effect, when the display suggesting that there is a big hit in the hold is performed, the effect of moving the second movable accessory 15 is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the suggestion that there is a big hit in the hold by the movement of the second movable accessory 15, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the lamp effect is executed using the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 when the display suggesting that there is a big hit in the hold is performed in the revival effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize that the lamp effect indicates that there is a big hit in the hold, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after a display suggesting that there is a big hit in the hold in the revival effect, the big hit symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the jackpot shortly after recognizing the reserved run, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the jackpot symbol array is formed by the jackpot symbol array stop effect in the revival effect, the jackpot symbol is used by using a special symbol for at least one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. An array is formed (see Modification 2 above). According to this configuration, the player can obtain a reserving ream from the resurrection after the result production, so that he can obtain great joy and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
In the following, there will be shown modifications of the reserved continuous absence effect, the reserved continuous presence effect, and the revival effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIG. 110 (B), (C) of the no-reserved continuous effect, FIG. 111 (B) of the reserved continuous effect, and FIGS. 112 (B) to (D) of the revival effect are jackpot games It may be executed during.

[Modification 2]
In the rebirth effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol array stop effect of FIG. 112 (E), the jackpot symbol array is formed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the 7 symbols of the check pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there is a jackpot in the hold, a jackpot symbol array may be formed using a special symbol for at least one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the reserved continuous absence effect or the resurrection effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the color of the result image E63 is changed by the result effect of FIG. 110 (C) or the result effect of FIG. 112 (C). By making a predetermined character appear, a continuation expectation degree (hereinafter also referred to as a resurrection expectation degree) in a short time state (RUSH) may be suggested. For example, in the result production of FIG. 110C, the probability that the color of the result image E63 is blue having a low restoration expectation level is set high, and in the result production of FIG. 112C, the color of the result image E63 is expected to be restored. By setting a high probability of red to be high, the player can recognize that the resurrection expectation is low when it is blue when the result image E63 appears, and when it is red Can recognize that resurrection expectations are high.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect that performs a suggestive effect that suggests whether there is a jackpot for holding,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a result image when it is suggested that there is no big hit in the hold in the suggestion effect,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying an image suggesting that there is a big hit in the hold,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E6-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing an accessory effect that moves an accessory,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of performing a lamp effect using a decorative lamp,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot symbol arrangement using a decorative symbol,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed, the sixth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E6-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect 4,
The jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbol includes a specific symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The countdown fluctuation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This countdown variation effect may be executed during a variation effect of a decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the countdown change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Is a display effect to be displayed.

[Countdown fluctuation effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect A. FIG. In the countdown variation effect A, first, the countdown display of FIG. 92 (A) is executed. Specifically, first, the numerical image IN1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The numerical image IN1 is a numerical value of a specific value, and is represented in Roman letters here. In this example, the numerical image IN1 is written in Roman letters, but may be written in other forms. Here, 4 is shown as a numerical value, but this is also an example, and the numerical value can be any value. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the forward direction changing effect shown in FIG. 92 (B) is executed. Specifically, after the numerical image IN1 is displayed, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. At this time, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move downward and start to change in the forward direction appearing from above the display screen 7a. The medium decorative design 8C has already been displayed in a variable manner.

  Next, the effect before the right decoration symbol stop shown in FIG. 92 (C) is executed. Specifically, in the state where the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed, the variation of the right decorative symbol 8R is decelerated. Then, after the right decorative symbol 8R having the same value as the numerical value stopped and displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L (here, “6”) is stopped and displayed, the player decelerates to the extent that the player thinks, and then FIG. The right decorative symbol sliding stop display shown in FIG. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R having the same numerical value as the numerical value stopped and displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L (here, “6”) is not stopped and displayed, and the next numerical value (here “5”) is stopped and displayed. Is done.

  Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 92 (E) is executed. Specifically, a numerical image IN2 having a numerical value that is decremented (subtracted) by 1 from the numerical image IN1 displayed in FIG. 92A is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image indicating 3 and is written in Roman letters as in the numerical image IN1.

  Next, the reverse direction fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 92 (F) is executed. Specifically, after the numerical image IN2 is displayed, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. At this time, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move upward and start to change in the reverse direction that appears from below the display screen 7a. The medium decorative design 8C has already been displayed in a variable manner.

  Next, the left-right decorative symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 92 (G) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R decelerate in parallel in a state where the middle decorative design 8C is variably displayed. At this time, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R have the same numerical value (here, “6”). Then, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, and the reach effect shown in FIG. 92 (H) is executed.

[Countdown variation effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect B. FIG. The countdown variation effect B is different from the countdown variation effect A of FIG. 92 in the form of the numerical image IN1. In the countdown display of FIG. 93A, a numerical image IN1 surrounded by a frame is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, although 1 is shown as a numerical value, this is also an example, and the numerical value can be an arbitrary value. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the forward direction changing effect shown in FIG. 93 (B) is executed. Here, the display of the numerical image IN1 is continued during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each move downward and start to change in the forward direction appearing from above the display screen 7a.

  93C is the same as the countdown variation effect A of FIG. 92 except that the display of the numerical image IN1 is continued. It is the same.

  Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 93 (E) is executed. Specifically, first, a numerical value image IN2 that is decremented (subtracted) from the numerical value image IN1 displayed in FIG. 93A is displayed on the display screen 7a surrounded by a frame. Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image indicating 0 (zero).

  Next, the reverse direction fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 93 (F) is executed. Here, the display of the numerical image IN1 is continued during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each move upward, and start to change in the reverse direction that appears from below the display screen 7a.

  93G is the same as countdown variation effect A in FIG. 92 except that the display of numerical image IN2 is continued.

[Countdown variation effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the countdown variation effect C. In FIG. The countdown variation effect C is compared with the countdown variation effect A of FIG. 92, and the countdown variation effect B is displayed with the aspect of the numerical image IN1 and the specific image IMC compared with the countdown variation effect A of FIG. Is different. In the countdown display of FIG. 94A, the translucent numerical image IN1 and the specific image IMC are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the numerical image IN1 is written in Roman letters, but may be written in other forms. The numerical value can be any value. The specific image IMC is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smile. A specific object means anything that can be recognized as one independent object. In addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures and characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, Etc. are also included. The specific image IMC is displayed so as to overlap the semitransparent numerical image IN1. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a.

  Next, the forward direction changing effect shown in FIG. 94 (B) is executed. Here, the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the medium decorative design 8C. That is, in the state in which the specific image IMC is displayed between the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move downward and appear in the forward direction from above the display screen 7a. The fluctuation starts at.

  The right decorative symbol stop effect in FIG. 94 (C) and the right decorative symbol slip stop display in FIG. 94 (D) count down in FIG. 92 except that the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the middle decorative symbol 8C. This is the same as the variation effect A.

  Next, the countdown display shown in FIG. 94 (E) is executed. Specifically, first, a numerical value image IN2 that is decremented (subtracted) from the numerical value image IN1 displayed in FIG. 94A and the specific image IMC are displayed on the display screen 7a. . Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image indicating 3 in Roman letters, and is displayed in a semi-transparent manner like the numerical image IN1. The specific image IMC is displayed so as to overlap the semitransparent numerical image IN2.

  Next, the reverse direction fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 94 (F) is executed. Here, the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the medium decorative design 8C. That is, in a state where the specific image IMC is displayed between the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move upward and appear in the reverse direction that appears from below the display screen 7a. The fluctuation starts at.

  The effect before stoppage of the left and right decorative symbols in FIG. 94 (G) and the reach effect in FIG. 94 (H) are the same as the countdown variation effect A in FIG. 92 except that the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the middle decorative symbol 8C. It is the same.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of the countdown fluctuation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, after the first effect that the numerical image IN1 is displayed on the display screen 7a and the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. Can be executed with the second effect that is displayed in a variable manner. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, after the second effect, the third effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, and after the third effect. The fourth effect in which the numerical image IN2 decremented by 1 from the numerical image IN2 displayed in the first effect is displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, after the fourth effect, the reverse variation display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move in the direction opposite to the variation display is performed. The fifth effect can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the third effect, the reach effect by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not executed, and after the fifth effect, the decorative symbol 8L. , 8C, 8R, the reach effect is executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the fifth effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move from the lower direction to the upper direction. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the above-mentioned countdown fluctuation effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the forward direction variation effect is started after the countdown display. However, after the countdown display, another effect may be executed before the forward direction change effect. For example, the state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed may be displayed. The same applies between the countdown display and the reverse direction change effect. Further, the countdown variation effect may include a part of each effect shown in FIGS. 92 to 94. For example, the countdown variation effect may not include the right decorative design slip stop effect.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the forward variation effect is such that the decorative symbol moves from the upper direction to the lower direction of the display screen 7a. However, the forward direction variation effect may be an effect of a variation mode other than this. For example, the forward direction variation effect may be an effect in which the decorative symbol moves from the left direction to the right direction on the display screen 7a. The same applies to the reverse direction change effect.

[Modification 3]
In the countdown variation effect, the countdown display is executed twice (for example, FIG. 92A and FIG. 92E). However, the number of countdown displays can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the countdown variation effect A, FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (D) may be repeated a plurality of times, and thereafter FIG. 92 (E) to FIG. 92 (H) may be executed. At this time, the numerical image IN1 is sequentially decremented by one.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D10-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a numerical image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative design,
A first effect in which the numerical image is displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the decorative design is variably displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ Aspect D10-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D10-1,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed,
After the third effect, it is possible to execute a fourth effect in which a numerical image decremented by 1 from the numerical image displayed in the first effect is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ Aspect D10-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D10-2,
After the fourth effect, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which a reverse variation display is performed in which the decorative design moves in a direction opposite to the variation display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D10-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect D10-3,
In the third effect, the reach effect by the decorative design is not executed,
After the fifth effect, a reach effect is executed by the decorative design.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ Aspect D10-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect D10-3 or aspect D10-4,
In the fifth effect, the decorative design moves upward from the lower direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The operation unit image superimposing effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation unit image superimposing effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation unit image superimposition effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Operation section image superimposing effect A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image superimposing effect A. FIG. In the operation unit image superimposing effect A, first, the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect of FIG. 95 (A) is executed. Specifically, first, the operation unit image BI1, the first specific image IC1, and the character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation unit image BI1 is an image representing the appearance of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1, and here represents the appearance of the effect button 63. Note that the operation unit image BI <b> 1 may represent the appearance of an operation unit other than the effect button 63 as long as it is an operation unit included in the gaming machine 1. The first specific image IC1 is an image representing a specific target, and here represents the shape of a smile. A specific object means anything that can be recognized as one independent object. In addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures and characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, Etc. are also included. The operation unit image BI1 is displayed so as to cover a part of the lower side of the first specific image IC1. The character image IW1 represents characters related to the operation method of the operation unit image BI1. Here, “Press!” Is displayed as a character related to the operation method of the effect button 63 represented by the operation unit image BI1. In addition, when the operation part image BI1 represents the effect button 63, as a character image related to the operation method, “continuous hit”, “PUSH”, and the like can be exemplified. The character image IW1 is displayed so as to overlap the first specific image IC1.

  Next, the specific image corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 95 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit image BI1. Here, the first specific image IC1 moves (vibrates) in the vertical direction. That is, the effect button 63 represented by the operation unit image BI1 is because the operation direction is the vertical direction. For example, when the first specific image IC1 represents the handle 60, the first specific image IC1 rotates to the left and right.

  Next, the specific image enlarging effect shown in FIG. 95 (C) is executed. Specifically, the second specific image IC2 is displayed instead of the first specific image IC1. The second specific image IC2 is an image representing the same specific object as the first specific image IC1, and is larger in size than the first specific image IC1. That is, in the specific image enlarging effect, the effect of enlarging the image representing the specific target (here, smile) is performed by switching from the first specific image IC1 to the second specific image IC2. Similar to the first specific image IC1, the lower part of the second specific image IC2 is covered with the operation unit image BI1. The character image IW1 is continuously displayed and is displayed so as to overlap the second specific image IC2.

  Next, the specific image corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 95 (D) is executed. Specifically, like the first specific image IC1, the second specific image IC2 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit image BI1. That is, it vibrates in the vertical direction. 95A to 95D, the first specific image IC1 vibrating in the vertical direction is switched to the second specific image IC2 vibrating in the vertical direction.

  Next, the specific image enlarging effect shown in FIG. 95 (E) is executed. Specifically, the third specific image IC3 is displayed instead of the second specific image IC2. The third specific image IC3 is an image representing the same specific object as the second specific image IC2, and is larger in size than the second specific image IC2. That is, the first specific image IC1 is switched to the second specific image IC2 and the second specific image IC1 is switched to the third specific image IC2 by the specific image enlarging effect in FIGS. 95 (C) and 95 (E). Thus, an effect is produced in which an image representing a specific target (here, a smile) gradually becomes larger. Similar to the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2, the lower part of the third specific image IC3 is covered with the operation unit image BI1. The character image IW1 is continuously displayed, and is displayed so as to overlap the third specific image IC3.

  Next, the specific image corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 95 (F) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2, the third specific image IC3 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit image BI1. That is, it vibrates in the vertical direction. 95A to 95F, the first specific image IC1 vibrating in the vertical direction is switched to the second specific image IC2 vibrating in the vertical direction, and further in the vertical direction. An effect of switching to the vibrating third specific image IC3 is performed.

[Operation part image superimposition effect B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image superimposing effect B. The operation unit image superimposing effect B is different from the operation unit image superimposing effect A of FIG. In the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect in FIG. 96A, the first operation unit image BI1, the first specific image IC1, and the first character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The points other than the character content of the first character image IW1 are the same as the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect of FIG.

  Next, the enlarging / corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 96 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the first operation unit image BI1 while gradually increasing in size. Here, the first specific image IC1 moves (vibrates) in the vertical direction. That is, the effect button 63 represented by the first operation unit image BI1 is because the operation direction is the vertical direction. Further, the enlarging / corresponding movement effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the first operation unit image BI1 while further increasing in size.

  Next, the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect shown in FIG. 96 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second operation unit image AS1, the fourth specific image IC4, and the second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second operation section image AS1 is an image showing the appearance of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1, and here shows the appearance of the sword member 64 including the sword button 65. The fourth specific image IC4 is an image representing a specific target, and here represents a smile shape different from that of the first specific image IC1. The second operation unit image AS1 is displayed so as to cover a part of the fourth specific image IC4. In the second character image IW2, characters related to the operation method of the second operation unit image AS1 are represented. Here, “Push!” Is displayed as a character related to the operation method of the sword member 64 represented by the second operation section image AS1. The second character image IW2 is displayed so as to overlap the fourth specific image IC4.

  Next, the enlarging / corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 96 (E) is executed. Specifically, the fourth specific image IC4 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the second operation unit image AS1 while gradually increasing in size. Here, the fourth specific image IC4 moves in the vertical direction. That is, the operation direction of the sword member 64 represented by the second operation unit image AS1 is the vertical direction. Further, the enlarging / corresponding movement effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the fourth specific image IC4 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the second operation unit image AS1 while further increasing in size.

[Operation unit image superimposing effect C]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image superimposing effect C. In the operation unit image superimposing effect C, first, the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect of FIG. 97 (A) is executed. Specifically, the operation unit image BI1, the specific image IC1, and the first character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The points other than the specific image IC1 not moving up and down are the same as the specific image / operation unit image superimposing effect of FIG.

  Next, the specific image viewing difficulty effect shown in FIG. 97 (B) is executed. Specifically, when the player operates the effect button 63, the specific image IC1 explodes and disappears, and the specific image IC1 becomes difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the operation unit image BI1 and the second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second character image IW2 is a character that suggests that an operation by the player has been detected, and is displayed as “Yay-a” here. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the operation unit image viewing difficulty rendering is executed. Specifically, the operation unit image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image IC1 and the second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Next, the specific image change effect shown in FIG. 97 (D) is executed. Specifically, the aspect of the specific image IC1 changes. The change in the form is, for example, a change in color or shape. Here, the color of the specific image IC1 changes from the first color to the second color. The color change of the specific image IC1 may be an aspect in which the first color and the second color are alternately repeated.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of an operation part image superimposition effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the state where the first specific image IC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the operation unit image is covered so as to cover at least a part of the first specific image IC1. A first effect in which BI1 is displayed and a second effect in which a second specific image IC2 larger than the first specific image IC1 is displayed after the first effect can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, after the second effect, the third effect in which the third specific image IC3 larger than the second specific image IC2 is displayed can be executed. It is. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the second effect, at least a part of the second specific image IC2 is covered with the operation unit image BI1. . According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the third effect, at least a part of the third specific image IC3 is covered with the operation unit image BI1. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the first effect, the first specific image IC1 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit image BI1. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the first effect, an image related to the operation method of the operation unit image BI1 is displayed on at least a part of the first specific image IC1. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an operation part image superimposition effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the operation unit image superimposing effect A in FIG. 95, the operation unit image BI1 covers at least a part of the first specific image IC1. However, the operation unit image BI1 may cover the entire first specific image IC1. The operation unit image BI1 covers a part of each of the second specific image IC2 and the third specific image IC3. However, the operation unit image BI1 may not cover at least one of the second specific image IC2 and the third specific image IC3.

[Modification 2]
The operation unit image superimposing effects A to C shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 are a part of examples, and may not include a part of the series of effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 97. In addition, other effects may be included between the series of effects shown in FIGS. For example, in the operation unit image superimposing effect A in FIG. 95, the specific image enlarging effect is performed twice, but it may be performed once or may be performed three times or more.

[Modification 3]
The operation unit image superimposing effects A to C shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 are only a part of examples, and even if a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of FIGS. 95 to 97 is not displayed. Alternatively, other images may be further displayed. For example, in the operation unit image superimposing effect A in FIG. 95, the character image IW1 may not be displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation unit image representing an appearance of the operation unit,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target,
A first effect in which the operation means image is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the first specific image in a state where the first specific image is displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the second specific image larger than the first specific image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the third specific image larger than the second specific image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2,
In the second effect, at least a part of the second specific image is covered with the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
In the third effect, at least a part of the third specific image is covered with the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4,
In the first effect, the first specific image moves in a direction corresponding to an operation direction of the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5,
In the first effect, an image related to the operation method of the operation means is displayed on at least a part of the first specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Other variations]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited thereto. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a swing-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrangement ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from a gaming ball to a gaming medal.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit to be operated by the player. . Moreover, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display effect may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63. Instead, the display effect is performed using an image representing the sword member 64. You may make it perform, and you may make it perform a display effect using the image showing a lever or a trigger.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

  Further, two or more effects and / or modifications may be combined among the above-described effects and / or modifications. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the display effect described above may be executed by the sub display device.

  As mentioned above, although this aspect was demonstrated based on embodiment and a modification, embodiment of an above-described aspect is for making an understanding of this aspect easy, and does not limit this aspect. This aspect can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents are included in this aspect.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area | region 7 ... Image display apparatus 9A ... 1st hold icon 9B ... 1st hold icon 9C ... 2nd hold icon 15 ... Board movable body 20 ... 1st starting port (1st entrance)
21 ... 2nd starting port (2nd entrance)
81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine,
Provided with display means that can execute multiple types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the first mode in the hold corresponding area corresponding to the hold display area for displaying the hold,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the second mode in the hold corresponding area corresponding to the hold display area,
The third display effect is an effect of selecting one of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode and displaying the selected mode.
The first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect are performed with the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images